TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
TMS320DM642
Video/Imaging Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Check for Samples: TMS320DM642
1 TMS320DM642 Video/Imaging Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
123
• High-Performance Digital Media Processor
– 2-, 1.67-, 1.39-ns Instruction Cycle Time
– 500-, 600-, 720-MHz Clock Rate
– Eight 32-Bit Instructions/Cycle
– 4000, 4800, 5760 MIPS
– Fully Software-Compatible With C64x™
• VelociTI.2™ Extensions to VelociTI™
Advanced Very-Long-Instruction-Word (VLIW)
TMS320C64x™ DSP Core
– Eight Highly Independent Functional Units
With VelociTI.2™ Extensions:
• Six ALUs (32-/40-Bit), Each Supports
Single 32-Bit, Dual 16-Bit, or Quad 8-Bit
Arithmetic per Clock Cycle
• Two Multipliers Support Four 16 x 16-Bit
Multiplies (32-Bit Results) per Clock
Cycle or Eight 8 x 8-Bit Multiplies (16-Bit
Results) per Clock Cycle
– Load-Store Architecture With Non-Aligned
Support
– 64 32-Bit General-Purpose Registers
– Instruction Packing Reduces Code Size
– All Instructions Conditional
• Instruction Set Features
– Byte-Addressable (8-/16-/32-/64-Bit Data)
– 8-Bit Overflow Protection
– Bit-Field Extract, Set, Clear
– Normalization, Saturation, Bit-Counting
– VelociTI.2™ Increased Orthogonality
• L1/L2 Memory Architecture
– 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1P Program Cache
(Direct Mapped)
– 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1D Data Cache (2-Way
Set-Associative)
– 2M-Bit (256K-Byte) L2 Unified Mapped
RAM/Cache (Flexible RAM/Cache Allocation)
• Endianess: Little Endian, Big Endian
• 64-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF)
– Glueless Interface to Asynchronous
Memories (SRAM and EPROM) and
Synchronous Memories (SDRAM, SBSRAM,
ZBT SRAM, and FIFO)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– 1024M-Byte Total Addressable External
Memory Space
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (64 Independent Channels)
10/100 Mb/s Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
– IEEE 802.3 Compliant
– Media Independent Interface (MII)
– 8 Independent Transmit (TX) Channels and 1
Receive (RX) Channel
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
Three Configurable Video Ports
– Providing a Glueless I/F to Common Video
Decoder and Encoder Devices
– Supports Multiple Resolutions/Video Stds
VCXO Interpolated Control Port (VIC)
– Supports Audio/Video Synchronization
Host-Port Interface (HPI) [32-/16-Bit]
32-Bit/66-MHz, 3.3-V Peripheral Component
Interconnect (PCI) Master/Slave Interface
Conforms to PCI Specification 2.2
Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP)
– Eight Serial Data Pins
– Wide Variety of I2S and Similar Bit Stream
Formats
– Integrated Digital Audio I/F Transmitter
Supports S/PDIF, IEC60958-1, AES-3, CP-430
Formats
Inter-Integrated Circuit ( I2C Bus™)
Two Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports
Three 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers
Sixteen General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
Flexible PLL Clock Generator
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-Scan-Compatible
548-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package
(GDK and ZDK Suffixes), 0.8-mm Ball Pitch
548-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package
(GNZ and ZNZ Suffixes), 1.0-mm Ball Pitch
0.13-µm/6-Level Cu Metal Process (CMOS)
3.3-V I/O, 1.2-V Internal (-500)
3.3-V I/O, 1.4-V Internal (A-500, A-600, -600,
-720)
1
2
3
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
I2C Bus is a trademark of Philips Electronics N.V..
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date.
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not
necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
The TMS320C64x™ DSPs (including the TMS320DM642 device) are the highest-performance fixed-point
DSP generation in the TMS320C6000™ DSP platform. The TMS320DM642 (DM642) device is based on
the second-generation high-performance, advanced VelociTI™ very-long-instruction-word (VLIW)
architecture (VelociTI.2™) developed by Texas Instruments (TI), making these DSPs an excellent choice
for digital media applications. The C64x™ is a code-compatible member of the C6000™ DSP platform.
With performance of up to 5760 million instructions per second (MIPS) at a clock rate of 720 MHz, the
DM642 device offers cost-effective solutions to high-performance DSP programming challenges. The
DM642 DSP possesses the operational flexibility of high-speed controllers and the numerical capability of
array processors. The C64x™ DSP core processor has 64 general-purpose registers of 32-bit word length
and eight highly independent functional units—two multipliers for a 32-bit result and six arithmetic logic
units (ALUs)—with VelociTI.2™ extensions. The VelociTI.2™ extensions in the eight functional units
include new instructions to accelerate the performance in video and imaging applications and extend the
parallelism of the VelociTI™ architecture. The DM642 can produce four 16-bit multiply-accumulates
(MACs) per cycle for a total of 2880 million MACs per second (MMACS), or eight 8-bit MACs per cycle for
a total of 5760 MMACS. The DM642 DSP also has application-specific hardware logic, on-chip memory,
and additional on-chip peripherals similar to the other C6000™ DSP platform devices.
The DM642 uses a two-level cache-based architecture and has a powerful and diverse set of peripherals.
The Level 1 program cache (L1P) is a 128-Kbit direct mapped cache and the Level 1 data cache (L1D) is
a 128-Kbit 2-way set-associative cache. The Level 2 memory/cache (L2) consists of an 2-Mbit memory
space that is shared between program and data space. L2 memory can be configured as mapped
memory, cache, or combinations of the two. The peripheral set includes: three configurable video ports; a
10/100 Mb/s Ethernet MAC (EMAC); a management data input/output (MDIO) module; a VCXO
interpolated control port (VIC); one multichannel buffered audio serial port (McASP0); an inter-integrated
circuit (I2C) Bus module; two multichannel buffered serial ports (McBSPs); three 32-bit general-purpose
timers; a user-configurable 16-bit or 32-bit host-port interface (HPI16/HPI32); a peripheral component
interconnect (PCI); a 16-pin general-purpose input/output port (GP0) with programmable interrupt/event
generation modes; and a 64-bit glueless external memory interface (EMIFA), which is capable of
interfacing to synchronous and asynchronous memories and peripherals.
The DM642 device has three configurable video port peripherals (VP0, VP1, and VP2). These video port
peripherals provide a glueless interface to common video decoder and encoder devices. The DM642
video port peripherals support multiple resolutions and video standards (e.g., CCIR601, ITU-BT.656,
BT.1120, SMPTE 125M, 260M, 274M, and 296M).
These three video port peripherals are configurable and can support either video capture and/or video
display modes. Each video port consists of two channels — A and B with a 5120-byte capture/display
buffer that is splittable between the two channels.
For more details on the Video Port peripherals, see the TMS320C64x DSP Video Port/VCXO Interpolated
Control (VIC) Port Reference Guide (literature number SPRU629).
The McASP0 port supports one transmit and one receive clock zone, with eight serial data pins which can
be individually allocated to any of the two zones. The serial port supports time-division multiplexing on
each pin from 2 to 32 time slots. The DM642 has sufficient bandwidth to support all 8 serial data pins
transmitting a 192-kHz stereo signal. Serial data in each zone may be transmitted and received on
multiple serial data pins simultaneously and formatted in a multitude of variations on the Philips Inter-IC
Sound (I2S) format.
In addition, the McASP0 transmitter may be programmed to output multiple S/PDIF, IEC60958, AES-3,
CP-430 encoded data channels simultaneously, with a single RAM containing the full implementation of
user data and channel status fields.
McASP0 also provides extensive error-checking and recovery features, such as the bad clock detection
circuit for each high-frequency master clock which verifies that the master clock is within a programmed
frequency range.
2
TMS320DM642 Video/Imaging Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
The VCXO interpolated control (VIC) port provides digital-to-analog conversion with resolution from 9-bits
to up to 16-bits. The output of the VIC is a single bit interpolated D/A output.For more details on the VIC
port, see the TMS320C64x DSP Video Port/VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC) Port Reference Guide
(literature number SPRU629).
The ethernet media access controller (EMAC) provides an efficient interface between the DM642 DSP
core processor and the network. The DM642 EMAC support both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX, or 10
Mbits/second (Mbps) and 100 Mbps in either half- or full-duplex, with hardware flow control and quality of
service (QOS) support. The DM642 EMAC makes use of a custom interface to the DSP core that allows
efficient data transmission and reception. For more details on the EMAC, see the TMS320C6000 DSP
Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) / Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Module Reference
Guide (literature number SPRU628).
The management data input/output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in order to
enumerate all PHY devices in the system. Once a PHY candidate has been selected by the DSP, the
MDIO module transparently monitors its link state by reading the PHY status register. Link change events
are stored in the MDIO module and can optionally interrupt the DSP, allowing the DSP to poll the link
status of the device without continuously performing costly MDIO accesses. For more details on the
MDIO, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) / Management Data
Input/Output (MDIO) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU628).
The I2C0 port on the TMS320DM642 allows the DSP to easily control peripheral devices and
communicate with a host processor. In addition, the standard multichannel buffered serial port (McBSP)
can be used to communicate with serial peripheral interface (SPI) mode peripheral devices.
The DM642 has a complete set of development tools which includes: a new C compiler, an assembly
optimizer to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windows® debugger interface for visibility into
source code execution.
1.1
Device Compatibility
The DM642 device is a code-compatible member of the C6000™ DSP platform.
The C64x™ DSP generation of devices has a diverse and powerful set of peripherals.
For more detailed information on the device compatibility and similarities/differences among the DM642
and other C64x™ devices, see the TMS320DM642 Technical Overview (literature number SPRU615).
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320DM642 Video/Imaging Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
3
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
1.2
www.ti.com
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the DM642 device.
64
SDRAM
SBSRAM
TMS320DM642
EMIF A
Timer 2
ZBT SRAM
L1P Cache
Direct-Mapped
16K Bytes Total
Timer 1
FIFO
Timer 0
SRAM
VCXO
Interpolated
Control Port
(VIC)
ROM/FLASH
C64x DSP Core
Instruction Fetch
Control
Registers
I/O Devices
Instruction Dispatch
Advanced Instruction Packet
Video Port 2
(VP2)
Control
Logic
Instruction Decode
Video Port 0
(VP0)
OR
Data Path A
A Register File
A31−A16
A15−A0
8/10-bit VP0
AND
McBSP0(A)
OR
McASP0
Control
Video Port 1
(VP1)
OR
.L1
Enhanced
DMA
Controller
(EDMA)
.S1
.M1 .D1
Data Path B
Test
B Register File
B31−B16
B15−B0
.D2 .M2
.S2
Advanced
In-Circuit
Emulation
Interrupt
Control
.L2
L2
Cache
Memory
256kBytes
L1D Cache 2-Way Set-Associative
16K Bytes Total
8/10-bit VP1
AND
McBSP1(A)
(B)
PLL
(x1, x6, x12)
OR
McASP0
Data
Power-Down
Logic
PCI-66
OR
HPI32
OR
HPI16
AND/OR
EMAC
Boot Configuration
MDIO
16
2
A.
B.
GP0
I2C0
McBSPs: Framing Chips – H.100, MVIP, SCSA, T1, E1; AC97 Devices; SPI Devices; Codecs
The Video Port 0 (VP0) peripheral is muxed with the McBSP0 peripheral and the McASP0 control pins. The Video
Port 1 (VP1) peripheral is muxed with the McBSP1 peripheral and the McASP0 data pins. The PCI peripheral is
muxed with the HPI(32/16), EMAC, and MDIO peripherals. For more details on the multiplexed pins of these
peripherals, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram
4
TMS320DM642 Video/Imaging Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
1
TMS320DM642 Video/Imaging Fixed-Point Digital
Signal Processor ........................................ 1
................................. 3
1.2
Functional Block Diagram ............................ 4
Device Overview ........................................ 6
2.1
Device Characteristics ............................... 6
2.2
CPU (DSP Core) Description ........................ 7
2.3
Memory Map Summary ............................. 13
2.4
Bootmode ........................................... 16
2.5
Pin Assignments .................................... 16
2.6
Development ........................................ 50
Device Configurations ................................ 54
3.1
Configurations at Reset ............................ 54
3.2
Configurations After Reset ......................... 56
3.3
Peripheral Configuration Lock ...................... 59
3.4
Device Status Register Description ................ 61
3.5
Multiplexed Pin Configurations ..................... 63
3.6
Debugging Considerations ......................... 65
3.7
Configuration Examples ............................ 65
Device Operating Conditions ....................... 69
1.1
2
3
4
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Device Compatibility
4.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case
Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) ................................. 69
4.2
4.3
Recommended Operating Conditions .............. 69
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Case
Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ............ 70
5
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical
Specifications .......................................... 71
5.1
5.2
Parameter Information .............................. 71
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition
Behavior ............................................ 72
5.3
5.4
Power Supplies ..................................... 73
Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA)
Controller ........................................... 77
5.5
Interrupts ............................................ 81
5.6
Reset
83
5.7
Clock PLL
86
5.8
5.9
92
Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP0) Peripheral
..................................................... 108
...............................................
...........................................
External Memory Interface (EMIF) .................
......................
..........................
5.12 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) ........
5.13 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) .......
5.14 Video Port .........................................
5.15 VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC) .................
5.16 Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) .......
5.17 Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) ..........
5.18 Timer ..............................................
5.19 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............
5.20 JTAG ..............................................
Revision History ...........................................
6 Mechanical Data ......................................
6.1
Thermal Data ......................................
6.2
Packaging Information ............................
5.10
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
5.11
Host-Port Interface (HPI)
Contents
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
116
122
128
132
141
149
151
157
159
161
164
166
167
167
169
5
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
2 Device Overview
2.1
Device Characteristics
Table 2-1 provides an overview of the DM642 DSP. The table shows significant features of the device,
including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the CPU frequency, and the package type with pin
count.
Table 2-1. Characteristics of the DM642 Processor
HARDWARE FEATURES
DM642
EMIFA (64-bit bus width)
(clock source = AECLKIN)
1
EDMA (64 independent channels)
1
McASP0 (uses Peripheral Clock [AUXCLK])
1
I2C0 (uses Peripheral Clock)
Peripherals
Not all peripherals pins are
available at the same time
(For more detail, see the
Device Configuration
section).
1
HPI (32- or 16-bit user selectable)
1 (HPI16 or HPI32)
PCI (32-bit), 66-MHz/33-MHz
[DeviceID Register value 0x9065]
1
McBSPs
(internal clock source = CPU/4 clock frequency)
2
Configurable Video Ports (VP0, VP1, VP2)
3
10/100 Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
1
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
1
VCXO Interpolated Control Port (VIC)
1
32-Bit Timers
(internal clock source = CPU/8 clock frequency)
3
General-Purpose Input/Output Port (GP0)
16
Size (Bytes)
On-Chip Memory
288K
16K-Byte (16KB) L1 Program (L1P) Cache
16KB L1 Data (L1D) Cache
256KB Unified Mapped RAM/Cache (L2)
Organization
CPU ID + CPU Rev ID
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])
JTAG BSDL_ID
JTAGID register (address location: 0x01B3F008)
Frequency
MHz
Cycle Time
Voltage
0x0C01
0x0007902F
500, 600, 720
2 ns (DM642-500) and (DM642 A-500)
[500 MHz CPU, 100 MHz EMIF (1), 33 MHz PCI port]
1.67 ns (DM642-600) and (DM642A-600)
[600 MHz CPU, 133 MHz EMIF (1), 66 MHz PCI port]
1.39 ns (DM642-720)
[720 MHz CPU, 133 MHz EMIF (1), 66 MHz PCI port]
ns
1.2 V (–500)
1.4 V (A-500, A-600, -600, -720)
Core (V)
I/O (V)
PLL Options
BGA Package (2)
3.3 V
CLKIN frequency multiplier
23 x 23 mm
548-Pin BGA (GDK and ZDK)
27 x 27 mm
548-Pin BGA (GNZ and ZNZ)
Process Technology
µm
Product Status (3)
Product Preview (PP), Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
(1)
(2)
(3)
6
Bypass (x1), x6, x12
0.13 µm
PD
On this DM64x™ device, the rated EMIF speed affects only the SDRAM interface on the EMIF. For more detailed information, see the
EMIF device speed portion of this data sheet.
For the exact markings of pin A1, see the TMS320DM642 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (Literature Number: SPRZ196).
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
2.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
CPU (DSP Core) Description
The CPU fetches VelociTI™ advanced very-long instruction words (VLIWs) (256 bits wide) to supply up to
eight 32-bit instructions to the eight functional units during every clock cycle. The VelociTI™ VLIW
architecture features controls by which all eight units do not have to be supplied with instructions if they
are not ready to execute. The first bit of every 32-bit instruction determines if the next instruction belongs
to the same execute packet as the previous instruction, or whether it should be executed in the following
clock as a part of the next execute packet. Fetch packets are always 256 bits wide; however, the execute
packets can vary in size. The variable-length execute packets are a key memory-saving feature,
distinguishing the C64x CPUs from other VLIW architectures. The C64x™ VelociTI.2™ extensions add
enhancements to the TMS320C62x™ DSP VelociTI™ architecture. These enhancements include:
• Register file enhancements
• Data path extensions
• Quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit extensions with data flow enhancements
• Additional functional unit hardware
• Increased orthogonality of the instruction set
• Additional instructions that reduce code size and increase register flexibility
The CPU features two sets of functional units. Each set contains four units and a register file. One set
contains functional units .L1, .S1, .M1, and .D1; the other set contains units .D2, .M2, .S2, and .L2. The
two register files each contain 32 32-bit registers for a total of 64 general-purpose registers. In addition to
supporting the packed 16-bit and 32-/40-bit fixed-point data types found in the C62x™ VelociTI™ VLIW
architecture, the C64x™ register files also support packed 8-bit data and 64-bit fixed-point data types. The
two sets of functional units, along with two register files, compose sides A and B of the CPU [see the
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram, and Figure 2-1]. The four functional units on each side of
the CPU can freely share the 32 registers belonging to that side. Additionally, each side features a "data
cross path"—a single data bus connected to all the registers on the other side, by which the two sets of
functional units can access data from the register files on the opposite side. The C64x CPU pipelines
data-cross-path accesses over multiple clock cycles. This allows the same register to be used as a
data-cross-path operand by multiple functional units in the same execute packet. All functional units in the
C64x CPU can access operands via the data cross path. Register access by functional units on the same
side of the CPU as the register file can service all the units in a single clock cycle. On the C64x CPU, a
delay clock is introduced whenever an instruction attempts to read a register via a data cross path if that
register was updated in the previous clock cycle.
In addition to the C62x™ DSP fixed-point instructions, the C64x™ DSP includes a comprehensive
collection of quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit instruction set extensions. These VelociTI.2™ extensions allow the
C64x CPU to operate directly on packed data to streamline data flow and increase instruction set
efficiency. This is a key factor for video and imaging applications.
Another key feature of the C64x CPU is the load/store architecture, where all instructions operate on
registers (as opposed to data in memory). Two sets of data-addressing units (.D1 and .D2) are
responsible for all data transfers between the register files and the memory. The data address driven by
the .D units allows data addresses generated from one register file to be used to load or store data to or
from the other register file. The C64x .D units can load and store bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits), and
words (32 bits) with a single instruction. And with the new data path extensions, the C64x .D unit can load
and store doublewords (64 bits) with a single instruction. Furthermore, the non-aligned load and store
instructions allow the .D units to access words and doublewords on any byte boundary. The C64x CPU
supports a variety of indirect addressing modes using either linear- or circular-addressing with 5- or 15-bit
offsets. All instructions are conditional, and most can access any one of the 64 registers. Some registers,
however, are singled out to support specific addressing modes or to hold the condition for conditional
instructions (if the condition is not automatically "true").
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
7
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
The two .M functional units perform all multiplication operations. Each of the C64x .M units can perform
two 16 × 16-bit multiplies or four 8 × 8-bit multiplies per clock cycle. The .M unit can also perform 16 ×
32-bit multiply operations, dual 16 × 16-bit multiplies with add/subtract operations, and quad 8 × 8-bit
multiplies with add operations. In addition to standard multiplies, the C64x .M units include bit-count,
rotate, Galois field multiplies, and bidirectional variable shift hardware.
The two .S and .L functional units perform a general set of arithmetic, logical, and branch functions with
results available every clock cycle. The arithmetic and logical functions on the C64x CPU include single
32-bit, dual 16-bit, and quad 8-bit operations.
The processing flow begins when a 256-bit-wide instruction fetch packet is fetched from a program
memory. The 32-bit instructions destined for the individual functional units are "linked" together by "1" bits
in the least significant bit (LSB) position of the instructions. The instructions that are "chained" together for
simultaneous execution (up to eight in total) compose an execute packet. A "0" in the LSB of an
instruction breaks the chain, effectively placing the instructions that follow it in the next execute packet. A
C64x™ DSP device enhancement now allows execute packets to cross fetch-packet boundaries. In the
TMS320C62x™/TMS320C67x™ DSP devices, if an execute packet crosses the fetch-packet boundary
(256 bits wide), the assembler places it in the next fetch packet, while the remainder of the current fetch
packet is padded with NOP instructions. In the C64x™ DSP device, the execute boundary restrictions
have been removed, thereby, eliminating all of the NOPs added to pad the fetch packet, and thus,
decreasing the overall code size. The number of execute packets within a fetch packet can vary from one
to eight. Execute packets are dispatched to their respective functional units at the rate of one per clock
cycle and the next 256-bit fetch packet is not fetched until all the execute packets from the current fetch
packet have been dispatched. After decoding, the instructions simultaneously drive all active functional
units for a maximum execution rate of eight instructions every clock cycle. While most results are stored in
32-bit registers, they can be subsequently moved to memory as bytes, half-words, or doublewords. All
load and store instructions are byte-, half-word-, word-, or doubleword-addressable.
For more details on the C64x CPU functional units enhancements, see the following documents:
• TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189)
• TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395)
8
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
src1
.L1
src2
dst
long dst
long src
ST1b (Store Data)
ST1a (Store Data)
8
8
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
long src
long dst
dst
.S1 src1
Data Path A
8
8
Register
File A
(A0−A31)
src2
(A)
(A)
long dst
dst
.M1 src1
src2
LD1b (Load Data)
LD1a (Load Data)
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
DA1 (Address)
.D1
dst
src1
src2
2X
1X
src2
.D2 src1
dst
DA2 (Address)
LD2a (Load Data)
LD2b (Load Data)
32 LSBs
32 MSBs
src2
.M2 src1
dst
long dst
(A)
(A)
Register
File B
(B0− B31)
src2
Data Path B
.S2
src1
dst
long dst
long src
ST2a (Store Data)
ST2b (Store Data)
8
8
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
long src
long dst
dst
8
8
.L2 src2
src1
Control Register
File
A.
For the .M functional units, the long dst is 32 MSBs and the dst is 32 LSBs.
Figure 2-1. TMS320C64x™ CPU (DSP Core) Data Paths
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
9
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
2.2.1
www.ti.com
CPU Core Registers
Table 2-2. L2 Cache Registers (C64x)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
10
REGISTER NAME
0184 0000
CCFG
0184 0004 – 0184 0FFC
–
0184 1000
EDMAWEIGHT
0184 1004 – 0184 1FFC
–
0184 2000
L2ALLOC0
L2 allocation register 0
0184 2004
L2ALLOC1
L2 allocation register 1
0184 2008
L2ALLOC2
L2 allocation register 2
L2 allocation register 3
COMMENTS
Cache configuration register
Reserved
L2 EDMA access control register
Reserved
0184 200C
L2ALLOC3
0184 2010 – 0184 3FFC
–
0184 4000
L2WBAR
L2 writeback base address register
0184 4004
L2WWC
L2 writeback word count register
0184 4010
L2WIBAR
L2 writeback invalidate base address register
0184 4014
L2WIWC
L2 writeback invalidate word count register
0184 4018
L2IBAR
L2 invalidate base address register
0184 401C
L2IWC
L2 invalidate word count register
0184 4020
L1PIBAR
L1P invalidate base address register
0184 4024
L1PIWC
L1P invalidate word count register
0184 4030
L1DWIBAR
L1D writeback invalidate base address register
0184 4034
L1DWIWC
L1D writeback invalidate word count register
0184 4038 – 0184 4044
–
Reserved
Reserved
0184 4048
L1DIBAR
L1D invalidate base address register
0184 404C
L1DIWC
L1D invalidate word count register
0184 4050 – 0184 4FFC
–
0184 5000
L2WB
Reserved
L2 writeback all register
0184 5004
L2WBINV
0184 5008 – 0184 7FFC
–
L2 writeback invalidate all register
Reserved
0184 8000 – 0184 81FC
MAR0 to
MAR127
Reserved
0184 8200
MAR128
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8000 0000 – 80FF FFFF
0184 8204
MAR129
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8100 0000 – 81FF FFFF
0184 8208
MAR130
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8200 0000 – 82FF FFFF
0184 820C
MAR131
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8300 0000 – 83FF FFFF
0184 8210
MAR132
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8400 0000 – 84FF FFFF
0184 8214
MAR133
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8500 0000 – 85FF FFFF
0184 8218
MAR134
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8600 0000 – 86FF FFFF
0184 821C
MAR135
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8700 0000 – 87FF FFFF
0184 8220
MAR136
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8800 0000 – 88FF FFFF
0184 8224
MAR137
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8900 0000 – 89FF FFFF
0184 8228
MAR138
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8A00 0000 – 8AFF FFFF
0184 822C
MAR139
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8B00 0000 – 8BFF FFFF
0184 8230
MAR140
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8C00 0000 – 8CFF FFFF
0184 8234
MAR141
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8D00 0000 – 8DFF FFFF
0184 8238
MAR142
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8E00 0000 – 8EFF FFFF
0184 823C
MAR143
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8F00 0000 – 8FFF FFFF
0184 8240
MAR144
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9000 0000 – 90FF FFFF
0184 8244
MAR145
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9100 0000 – 91FF FFFF
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-2. L2 Cache Registers (C64x) (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 8248
MAR146
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9200 0000 – 92FF FFFF
REGISTER NAME
0184 824C
MAR147
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9300 0000 – 93FF FFFF
0184 8250
MAR148
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9400 0000 – 94FF FFFF
0184 8254
MAR149
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9500 0000 – 95FF FFFF
0184 8258
MAR150
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9600 0000 – 96FF FFFF
0184 825C
MAR151
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9700 0000 – 97FF FFFF
0184 8260
MAR152
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9800 0000 – 98FF FFFF
0184 8264
MAR153
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9900 0000 – 99FF FFFF
0184 8268
MAR154
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9A00 0000 – 9AFF FFFF
0184 826C
MAR155
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9B00 0000 – 9BFF FFFF
0184 8270
MAR156
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9C00 0000 – 9CFF FFFF
0184 8274
MAR157
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9D00 0000 – 9DFF FFFF
0184 8278
MAR158
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9E00 0000 – 9EFF FFFF
0184 827C
MAR159
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9F00 0000 – 9FFF FFFF
0184 8280
MAR160
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A000 0000 – A0FF FFFF
0184 8284
MAR161
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A100 0000 – A1FF FFFF
0184 8288
MAR162
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A200 0000 – A2FF FFFF
0184 828C
MAR163
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A300 0000 – A3FF FFFF
0184 8290
MAR164
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A400 0000 – A4FF FFFF
0184 8294
MAR165
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A500 0000 – A5FF FFFF
0184 8298
MAR166
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A600 0000 – A6FF FFFF
0184 829C
MAR167
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A700 0000 – A7FF FFFF
0184 82A0
MAR168
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A800 0000 – A8FF FFFF
0184 82A4
MAR169
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A900 0000 – A9FF FFFF
0184 82A8
MAR170
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AA00 0000 – AAFF FFFF
0184 82AC
MAR171
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AB00 0000 – ABFF FFFF
0184 82B0
MAR172
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AC00 0000 – ACFF FFFF
0184 82B4
MAR173
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AD00 0000 – ADFF FFFF
0184 82B8
MAR174
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AE00 0000 – AEFF FFFF
0184 82BC
MAR175
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AF00 0000 – AFFF FFFF
0184 82C0
MAR176
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B000 0000 – B0FF FFFF
0184 82C4
MAR177
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B100 0000 – B1FF FFFF
0184 82C8
MAR178
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B200 0000 – B2FF FFFF
0184 82CC
MAR179
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B300 0000 – B3FF FFFF
0184 82D0
MAR180
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B400 0000 – B4FF FFFF
0184 82D4
MAR181
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B500 0000 – B5FF FFFF
0184 82D8
MAR182
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B600 0000 – B6FF FFFF
0184 82DC
MAR183
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B700 0000 – B7FF FFFF
0184 82E0
MAR184
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B800 0000 – B8FF FFFF
0184 82E4
MAR185
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B900 0000 – B9FF FFFF
0184 82E8
MAR186
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BA00 0000 – BAFF FFFF
0184 82EC
MAR187
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BB00 0000 – BBFF FFFF
0184 82F0
MAR188
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BC00 0000 – BCFF FFFF
0184 82F4
MAR189
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BD00 0000 – BDFF FFFF
0184 82F8
MAR190
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BE00 0000 – BEFF FFFF
0184 82FC
MAR191
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BF00 0000 – BFFF FFFF
0184 8300 – 0184 83FC
MAR192 to
MAR255
COMMENTS
Reserved
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
11
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-2. L2 Cache Registers (C64x) (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 8400 – 0187 FFFF
–
12
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Reserved
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
2.3
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Memory Map Summary
Table 2-3 shows the memory map address ranges of the DM642 device. Internal memory is always
located at address 0 and can be used as both program and data memory. The external memory address
ranges in the DM642 device begin at the hex address location 0x8000 0000 for EMIFA.
Table 2-3. TMS320DM642 Memory Map Summary
BLOCK SIZE
(BYTES)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
Internal RAM (L2)
256K
0000 0000 – 0003 FFFF
Reserved
768K
0004 0000 – 000F FFFF
Reserved
23M
0010 0000 – 017F FFFF
External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) Registers
256K
0180 0000 – 0183 FFFF
L2 Registers
256K
0184 0000 – 0187 FFFF
HPI Registers
256K
0188 0000 – 018B FFFF
McBSP 0 Registers
256K
018C 0000 – 018F FFFF
McBSP 1 Registers
256K
0190 0000 – 0193 FFFF
Timer 0 Registers
256K
0194 0000 – 0197 FFFF
Timer 1 Registers
256K
0198 0000 – 019B FFFF
Interrupt Selector Registers
256K
019C 0000 – 019F FFFF
EDMA RAM and EDMA Registers
256K
01A0 0000 – 01A3 FFFF
Reserved
512K
01A4 0000 – 01AB FFFF
Timer 2 Registers
256K
01AC 0000 – 01AF FFFF
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
GP0 Registers
256K – 4K
01B0 0000 – 01B3 EFFF
Device Configuration Registers
4K
01B3 F000 – 01B3 FFFF
I2C0 Data and Control Registers
16K
01B4 0000 – 01B4 3FFF
Reserved
32K
01B4 4000 – 01B4 BFFF
McASP0 Control Registers
16K
01B4 C000 – 01B4 FFFF
Reserved
192K
01B5 0000 – 01B7 FFFF
Reserved
256K
01B8 0000 – 01BB FFFF
Emulation
256K
01BC 0000 – 01BF FFFF
PCI Registers
256K
01C0 0000 – 01C3 FFFF
VP0 Control
16K
01C4 0000 – 01C4 3FFF
VP1 Control
16K
01C4 4000 – 01C4 7FFF
VP2 Control
16K
01C4 8000 – 01C4 BFFF
VIC Control
16K
01C4 C000 – 01C4 FFFF
Reserved
192K
01C5 0000 – 01C7 FFFF
EMAC Control
4K
01C8 0000 – 01C8 0FFF
EMAC Wrapper
8K
01C8 1000 – 01C8 2FFF
EWRAP Registers
2K
01C8 3000 – 01C8 37FF
MDIO Control Registers
Reserved
QDMA Registers
Reserved
2K
01C8 3800 – 01C8 3FFF
3.5M
01C8 4000 – 01FF FFFF
52
0200 0000 – 0200 0033
736M – 52
0200 0034 – 2FFF FFFF
McBSP 0 Data
64M
3000 0000 – 33FF FFFF
McBSP 1 Data
64M
3400 0000 – 37FF FFFF
Reserved
64M
3800 0000 – 3BFF FFFF
McASP0 Data
1M
3C00 0000 – 3C0F FFFF
Reserved
64M – 1M
3C10 0000 – 3FFF FFFF
Reserved
832M
4000 0000 – 73FF FFFF
VP0 Channel A Data
32M
7400 0000 – 75FF FFFF
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
13
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-3. TMS320DM642 Memory Map Summary (continued)
BLOCK SIZE
(BYTES)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
VP0 Channel B Data
32M
7600 0000 – 77FF FFFF
VP1 Channel A Data
32M
7800 0000 – 79FF FFFF
VP1 Channel B Data
32M
7A00 0000 – 7BFF FFFF
VP2 Channel A Data
32M
7C00 0000 – 7DFF FFFF
VP2 Channel B Data
32M
7E00 0000 – 7FFF FFFF
EMIFA CE0
256M
8000 0000 – 8FFF FFFF
EMIFA CE1
256M
9000 0000 – 9FFF FFFF
EMIFA CE2
256M
A000 0000 – AFFF FFFF
EMIFA CE3
256M
B000 0000 – BFFF FFFF
1G
C000 0000 – FFFF FFFF
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
Reserved
14
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
2.3.1
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
L2 Architecture Expanded
Figure 2-2 shows the detail of the L2 architecture on the TMS320DM642 device. For more information on
the L2MODE bits, see the cache configuration (CCFG) register bit field descriptions in the TMS320C64x
Two-Level Internal Memory Reference Guide (literature number SPRU610).
L2MODE
000
001
010
L2 Memory
011
Block Base Address
111
128K SRAM
0x0000 0000
256K SRAM (All)
256K Cache (4 Way) [All]
224K SRAM
192K SRAM
128K-Byte SRAM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
0x0002 0000
128K Cache (4 Way)
64K Cache (4 Way)
(4 Way)
32K Cache
64K-Byte RAM
0x0003 0000
32K-Byte RAM
0x0003 8000
32K-Byte RAM
0x0003 FFFF
0x0004 0000
Figure 2-2. TMS320DM642 L2 Architecture Memory Configuration
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
15
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
2.4
www.ti.com
Bootmode
The DM642 device resets using the active-low signal RESET. While RESET is low, the device is held in
reset and is initialized to the prescribed reset state. Refer to reset timing for reset timing characteristics
and states of device pins during reset. The release of RESET starts the processor running with the
prescribed device configuration and boot mode.
The DM642 has three types of boot modes:
• Host boot
If host boot is selected, upon release of RESET, the CPU is internally "stalled" while the remainder of
the device is released. During this period, an external host can initialize the CPU's memory space as
necessary through the host interface, including internal configuration registers, such as those that
control the EMIF or other peripherals. For the DM642 device, the HPI peripheral is used for host boot if
PCI_EN = 0, and the PCI peripheral is used if PCI_EN = 1. Once the host is finished with all necessary
initialization, it must set the DSPINT bit in the HPIC register to complete the boot process. This
transition causes the boot configuration logic to bring the CPU out of the "stalled" state. The CPU then
begins execution from address 0. The DSPINT condition is not latched by the CPU, because it occurs
while the CPU is still internally "stalled". Also, DSPINT brings the CPU out of the "stalled" state only if
the host boot process is selected. All memory may be written to and read by the host. This allows for
the host to verify what it sends to the DSP if required. After the CPU is out of the "stalled" state, the
CPU needs to clear the DSPINT, otherwise, no more DSPINTs can be received.
• EMIF boot (using default ROM timings)
Upon the release of RESET, the 1K-Byte ROM code located in the beginning of CE1 is copied to
address 0 by the EDMA using the default ROM timings, while the CPU is internally "stalled". The data
should be stored in the endian format that the system is using. In this case, the EMIF automatically
assembles consecutive 8-bit bytes to form the 32-bit instruction words to be copied. The transfer is
automatically done by the EDMA as a single-frame block transfer from the ROM to address 0. After
completion of the block transfer, the CPU is released from the "stalled" state and starts running from
address 0.
• No boot
With no boot, the CPU begins direct execution from the memory located at address 0. Note: operation
is undefined if invalid code is located at address 0.
2.5
2.5.1
Pin Assignments
Pin Map
Figure 2-3 through Figure 2-6 show the DM642 pin assignments in four quadrants (A, B, C, and D).
16
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
AF
VSS
DVDD
RSV
VP1CTL0
VP1D[0]
VP1D[1]
VSS
VP1CLK0
VSS
VP1CLK1
VSS
VP0CLK1
VSS
AE
DVDD
DVDD
VSS
CLKMODE1
VP1CTL1
VP1D[2]/
CLKX1
VP1D[5]/
CLKS1
VSS
VP1D[10]
VSS
VP1D[15]/
AXR0[3]
VSS
DVDD
AD
VDAC/
GP0[8]/
PCI66
VSS
RSV
VSS
VP1CTL2
VP1D[3]/
FSX1
VP1D[6]/
DR1
VP1D[8]/
CLKR1
VP1D[11]
VP1D[13]/
AXR0[1]
VP1D[16]/
AXR0[4]
VP0D[18]/
AFSX0
VP0D[15]/
AMUTEIN0
AC
STCLK
CLKIN
VSS
RSV
VSS
VP1D[4]/
DX1
VP1D[7]/
FSR1
VP1D[9]
VP1D[12]/
AXR0[0]
VP1D[14]/
AXR0[2]
VP1D[17]/
AXR0[5]
VP0D[19]/
AHCLKX0
VP0D[16]/
AMUTE0
AB
VSS
VSS
RSV
VSS
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
VP1D[18]/
AXR0[6]
VP1D[19]/
AXR0[7]
VP0D[17]/
ACLKX0
AA
HD1/
AD1
CLKMODE0
RSV
VSS
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
VSS
VSS
DVDD
VSS
Y
HD5/
AD5
HD3/
AD3
HD0/
AD0
HD2/
AD2
DVDD
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
W
VSS
HD7/
AD7
HD4/
AD4
HD6/
AD6
DVDD
VSS
RSV
V
HD10/
AD10
HD8/
AD8
HD9/
AD9
PCBE0
VSS
PLLV
VSS
U
HD14/
AD14
HD12/
AD12
HD13/
AD13
HD11/
AD11
DVDD
VSS
CVDD
T
VSS
HDS2/
PCBE1
HD15/
AD15
XSP_CS
VSS
VSS
CVDD
R
HCS/
PPERR
HDS1/
PSERR
HCNTL0/
PSTOP
XSP_DI
XSP_CLK/
MDCLK
RSV
VSS
VSS
CVDD
P
HCNTL1/
PDEVSEL
VSS
HAS/
PPAR
RESET
XSP_DO/
MDIO
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
8
9
10
11
Figure 2-3. DM642 Pin Map [Quadrant A]
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
17
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
VP0CLK0
VSS
VP0D[3]/
FSX0
VP0D[2]/
CLKX0
VP0D[0]
VSS
AED50
AED54
VSS
AED62
AED63
DVDD
VSS
AF
VSS
VP0D[8]/
CLKR0
VP0D[4]/
DX0
VP0CTL0
VP0D[1]
VSS
AED52
AED56
AED58
AED61
VSS
DVDD
DVDD
AE
VP0D[12]/
ACLKR0
VP0D[9]
VP0D[5]/
CLKS0
VP0CTL2
VSS
AED48
AED53
AED57
AED59
AED60
DVDD
AED33
AED32
AD
VP0D[13]/
AFSR0
VP0D[10]
VP0D[6]/
DR0
VP0CTL1
VSS
AED49
AED51
AED55
VSS
DVDD
VSS
AED34
AED35
AC
VP0D[14]/
AHCLKR0
VP0D[11]
VP0D[7]/
FSR0
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
AED38
AED36
AED37
VSS
AB
VSS
DVDD
VSS
VSS
DVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
AED41
AED39
AED40
AED42
AA
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
DVDD
AED45
AED43
AED44
AED46
Y
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
AED47
AHOLD
DVDD
VSS
W
VSS
DVDD
VSS
AEA18
AEA21
AEA20
AEA19
V
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
AEA22
AEA17
AEA16
AEA15
U
CVDD
VSS
ABE7
ABE6
AEA14
AEA13
VSS
T
VSS
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
ASOE3
AEA12
AEA11
ABE5
ABE4
R
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
VSS
ABUSREQ
AEA10
AEA9
DVDD
AEA8
P
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
16
17
18
19
Figure 2-4. DM642 Pin Map [Quadrant B]
18
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
1
2
N
HRDY/
PIRDY
DVDD
M
HR/W/
PCBE2
HD17/
AD17/
MTXD1
L
VSS
K
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
HINT/
PFRAME
VSS
VSS
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
HD16/
AD16/
MTXD0
HD18/
AD18/
MTXD2
GP0[0]
DVDD
VSS
CVDD
VSS
HD19/
AD19/
MTXD3
HD20/
AD20/
MTXEN
HD22/
AD22/
MTCLK
GP0[3]/
PCIEEAI
VSS
CVDD
HD23/
AD23
HD21/
AD21/
MCOL
GP0[9]/
PIDSEL
HD24/
AD24/
MRXD0
DVDD
VSS
CVDD
J
HD25/
AD25/
MRXD1
GP0[10]/
PCBE3
HD26/
AD26/
MRXD2
HD28/
AD28/
MRXDV
VSS
DVDD
VSS
H
VSS
HD27/
AD27/
MRXD3
HD30/
AD30/
MCRS
GP0[12]/
PGNT
DVDD
VSS
RSV
G
HD31/
AD31/
MRCLK
HD29/
AD29/
MRXER
GP0[15]/
PRST
GP0[13]/
PINTA
DVDD
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
F
GP0[11]/
PREQ
GP0[6]/
EXT_INT6
GP0[5]/
EXT_INT5
GP0[4]/
EXT_INT4
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
VSS
VSS
DVDD
VSS
E
GP0[7]/
EXT_INT7
PCI_EN
VSS
SCL0
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
VP2D[14]
VP2D[18]
VP2D[19]
D
VSS
VSS
SDA0
DVDD
VSS
CLKOUT4/
GP0[1]
VP2CTL1
VP2D[1]
VP2D[5]
VP2D[9]
VP2D[13]
VP2D[17]
VSS
C
GP0[14]/
PCLK
VSS
DVDD
VSS
TOUT0/
MAC_EN
CLKOUT6/
GP0[2]
VP2CTL2
VP2D[0]
VP2D[4]
VP2D[8]
VP2D[12]
VP2D[16]
VSS
B
DVDD
DVDD
VSS
NMI
TOUT1/
LENDIAN
VSS
VSS
VP2CTL0
VP2D[3]
VP2D[7]
VP2D[11]
VP2D[15]
VSS
A
VSS
DVDD
VSS
TINP0
TINP1
VSS
VP2CLK0
VSS
VP2D[2]
VP2D[6]
VP2D[10]
VSS
VP2CLK1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
HHWIL/
PTRDY
8
9
10
11
Figure 2-5. DM642 Pin Map [Quadrant C]
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
19
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
14
15
VSS
CVDD
16
17
www.ti.com
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
AHOLDA
AEA7
AEA6
VSS
AEA5
N
VSS
VSS
DVDD
APDT
AEA4
AEA3
ABE3
ABE2
M
CVDD
VSS
AARDY
ABE1
ABE0
ASDCKE
ACE3
L
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
ACE2
ACE1
ACE0
VSS
DVDD
VSS
CVDD
VSS
DVDD
AED17
AED16
AECLKIN
VSS
H
AAOE/
AECLKOUT2 ASDRAS/
ASOE
AARE/
ASDCAS/
ASADS/
ASRE
26
AAWE/
ASDWE/
ASWE
K
AECLKOUT1 J
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
DVDD
AED19
AED21
AED20
AED18
G
VSS
DVDD
VSS
VSS
DVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
AED23
AED25
AED24
AED22
F
RSV
TMS
VSS
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
VSS
AED27
AED26
VSS
E
TRST
EMU4
EMU8
EMU11
VSS
AED14
AED12
AED8
VSS
DVDD
VSS
AED28
AED29
D
EMU1
EMU3
EMU6
EMU10
VSS
AED15
AED10
AED6
AED4
VSS
DVDD
AED30
AED31
C
DVDD
EMU2
EMU5
EMU9
TDO
VSS
AED11
AED7
AED3
AED2
AED0
DVDD
DVDD
B
VSS
EMU0
TCK
EMU7
TDI
VSS
AED13
AED9
VSS
AED5
AED1
DVDD
VSS
A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Figure 2-6. DM642 Pin Map [Quadrant D]
20
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
2.5.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Signal Groups Description
CLKIN
CLKOUT4/GP0[1](A)
CLKOUT6/GP0[2](A)
CLKMODE1
CLKMODE0
PLLV
TMS
TDO
TDI
TCK
TRST
EMU0
EMU1
EMU2
EMU3
EMU4
EMU5
EMU6
EMU7
EMU8
EMU9
EMU10
EMU11
Clock/PLL
Reset and
Interrupts
RESET
NMI
GP0[7]/EXT_INT7(B)
GP0[6]/EXT_INT6(B)
GP0[5]/EXT_INT5(B)
GP0[4]/EXT_INT4(B)
Reserved
RSV08
RSV07
RSV06
RSV05
RSV04
RSV03
RSV02
RSV01
RSV00
IEEE Standard
1149.1
(JTAG)
Emulation
Peripheral
Control/Status
PCI_EN
TOUT0/MAC_EN
Control/Status
GP0[15]/PRST(C)
GP0[14]/PCLK (C)
GP0[13]/PINTA (C)
GP0[12]/PGNT (C)
GP0[11]/PREQ (C)
GP0
GP0[10]/PCBE3(C)
GP0[9]/PIDSEL(C)
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66(C)
GP0[7]/EXT_INT7(B)
GP0[6]/EXT_INT6(B)
GP0[5]/EXT_INT5(B)
GP0[4]/EXT_INT4(B)
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
CLKOUT6/GP0[2](A)
CLKOUT4/GP0[1](A)
GP0[0]
General-Purpose Input/Output 0 (GP0) Port
A.
B.
C.
These pins are muxed with the GP0 pins and by default these signals function as clocks (CLKOUT4 or CLKOUT6).
To use these muxed pins as GPIO signals, the appropriate GPIO register bits (GPxEN and GPxDIR) must be properly
enabled and configured. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
These pins are GP0 pins that can also function as external interrupt sources (EXT_INT[7:4]). Default after reset is
EXT_INTx or GPIO as input-only.
These GP0 pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral pins and by default these signals are set up to no function with
both the GPIO and PCI pin functions disabled. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet.
Figure 2-7. CPU and Peripheral Signals
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
21
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
64
Data
AED[63:0]
ACE3
ACE2
Memory Map
Space Select
ACE1
ACE0
20
AEA[22:3]
ABE7
ABE6
ABE5
ABE4
ABE3
ABE2
ABE1
ABE0
AECLKIN
AECLKOUT1
AECLKOUT2
ASDCKE
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE
External
Memory I/F
Control
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
AARDY
ASOE3
APDT
Address
Byte Enables
AHOLD
AHOLDA
ABUSREQ
Bus
Arbitration
EMIFA (64-bit)
Data
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66
VCXO Interpolated
Control Port (VIC)
Figure 2-8. EMIFA/VIC Peripheral Signals
22
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
32
Data
HD[15:0]/AD[15:0]
HPI (A)
(Host-Port Interface)
HD[31:16]/AD[31:16](C)
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
Register Select
Control
Half-Word
Select
HHWIL/PTRDY
(HPI16 ONLY)
HAS/PPAR
HR/W/PCBE2
HCS/PPERR
HDS1/PSERR
HDS2/PCBE1
HRDY/PIRDY
HINT/PFRAME
32
HD[15:0]/AD[15:0]
HD[31:16]/AD[31:16](C)
Data/Address
GP0[10]/PCBE3
HR/W/PCBE2
HDS2/PCBE1
PCBE0
Command
Byte Enable
GP0[12]/PGNT
Clock
Control
Arbitration
Error
GP0[11]/PREQ
Serial
EEPROM
GP0[14]/PCLK
GP0[9]/PIDSEL
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
HINT/PFRAME
GP0[13]/PINTA
HAS/PPAR
GP0[15]/PRST
HRDY/PIRDY
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HHWIL/PTRDY
HDS1/PSERR
HCS/PPERR
XSP_DO/MDIO
XSP_CS
XSP_CLK/MDCLK
XSP_DI
PCI Interface (B)
A.
B.
C.
These HPI pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral. By default, these signals function as HPI. For more details on
these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
These PCI pins (excluding PCBE0 and XSP_CS) are muxed with the HPI or MDIO or GP0 peripherals. By default,
these signals function as HPI and no function, respectively. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet.
These HPI/PCI data pins (HD[31:16/AD[31:16]) are muxed with the EMAC peripheral. By default, these pins function
as HPI. For more details on the EMAC pin functions, see the Ethernet MAC (EMAC) peripheral signals section and
the terminal functions table portions of this data sheet.
Figure 2-9. HPI/PCI Peripheral Signals
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
23
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
McBSP1
McBSP0
VP1D[2]/CLKX1(A)
VP1D[3]/FSX1(A)
VP1D[4]/DX1 (A)
Transmit
Transmit
VP1D[8]/CLKR1(A)
VP1D[7]/FSR1(A)
VP1D[6]/DR1 (A)
Receive
Receive
VP1D[5]/CLKS1(A)
Clock
VP0D[2]/CLKX0(A)
VP0D[3]/FSX0(A)
VP0D[4]/DX0(A)
VP0D[8]/CLKR0(A)
VP0D[7]/FSR0(A)
VP0D[6]/DR0 (A)
VP0D[5]/CLKS0(A)
Clock
McBSPs
(Multichannel Buffered
Serial Ports)
TOUT1/LENDIAN
TINP1
TOUT0/MACEN
TINP0
Timer 0
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timers
SCL0
I2C0
SDA0
I2C0
A.
These McBSP1 and McBSP0 pins are muxed with the Video Port 1 (VP1) and Video Port 0 (VP0) peripherals,
respectively. By default, these signals function as VP1 and VP0, respectively. For more details on these muxed pins,
see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Figure 2-10. McBSP/Timer/I2C0 Peripheral Signals
24
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
EMAC
HD16/AD16/MTXD0(A)
HD17/AD17/MTXD1(A)
HD18/AD18/MTXD2(A)
HD19/AD19/MTXD3(A)
Transmit
MDIO
HD24/AD24/MRXD0(A)
HD25/AD25/MRXD1(A)
HD26/AD26/MRXD2(A)
HD27/AD27/MRXD3(A)
Receive
HD20/AD20/MTXEN(A)
HD29/AD29/MRXER(A)
HD28/AD28/MRXDV(A)
HD21/AD21/MCOL(A)
HD30/AD30/MCRS(A)
Error Detect
and Control
HD22/AD22/MTCLK(A)
HD31/AD31/MRCLK(A)
Clocks
Input/Output
Clock
XSP_DO/MDIO (B)
XSP_CLK/MDCLK(B)
Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
and MDIO
A.
B.
These EMAC pins are muxed with the upper data pins of the HPI or PCI peripherals. By default, these signals
function as HPI. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
These MDIO pins are muxed with the PCI peripherals. By default, these signals function as PCI. For more details on
these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Figure 2-11. EMAC/MDIO Peripheral Signals
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
25
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
STCLK (C)
VP0CLK0
VP0CLK1
VP0CTL0
VP0CTL1
VP0CTL2
VP0D[0]
VP0D[1]
VP0D[2]/CLKX0
VP0D[3]/FSX0
VP0D[4]/DX0
VP0D[5]/CLKS0
VP0D[6]/DR0
VP0D[7]/FSR0
VP0D[8]/CLKR0
VP0D[9]
www.ti.com
Timing and
Control Logic
VP0D[10]
VP0D[11]
VP0D[12]/ACLKR0
VP0D[13]/AFSR0
VP0D[14]/AHCLKR0
VP0D[15]/AMUTEIN0
VP0D[16]/AMUTE0
VP0D[17]/ACLKX0
VP0D[18]/AFSX0
VP0D[19]/AHCLKX0
Capture/Display
Buffer
(2560 Bytes)
Channel A (A)
Channel B uses only
the VP0D[19:10]
bidirectional pins
Capture/Display
Buffer
(2560 Bytes)
Channel B (B)
Video Port 0 (VP0)
A.
B.
C.
Channel A supports: BT.656 (8/10-bit), Y/C Video (16/20-bit), RAW Video (16/20-bit) display modes and BT.656
(8/10-bit), Y/C Video (16/20-bit), RAW Video (16/20-bit), and TSI (8-bit) capture modes.
Channel B supports: BT.656 (8/10-bit), RAW Video (8/10-bit) capture modes and can display synchronized RAW
Video data with Channel A.
The same STCLK signal is used for all three video ports (VP0, VP1, and VP2).
Figure 2-12. Video Port 0 Peripheral Signals
26
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
STCLK (C)
VP1CLK0
VP1CLK1
VP1CTL0
VP1CTL1
VP1CTL2
Timing and
Control Logic
VP1D[0]
VP1D[1]
VP1D[2]/CLKX1
VP1D[3]/FSX1
VP1D[4]/DX1
VP1D[5]/CLKS1
VP1D[6]/DR1
VP1D[7]/FSR1
VP1D[8]/CLKR1
VP1D[9]
VP1D[10]
VP1D[11]
VP1D[12]/AXR0[0]
VP1D[13]/AXR0[1]
VP1D[14]/AXR0[2]
VP1D[15]/AXR0[3]
VP1D[16]/AXR0[4]
VP1D[17]/AXR0[5]
VP1D[18]/AXR0[6]
VP1D[19]/AXR0[7]
Capture/Display
Buffer
(2560 Bytes)
Channel A (A)
Channel B uses only
the VP1D[19:10]
bidirectional pins
Capture/Display
Buffer
(2560 Bytes)
Channel B (B)
Video Port 1 (VP1)
A.
B.
C.
Channel A supports: BT.656 (8/10-bit), Y/C Video (16/20-bit), RAW Video (16/20-bit) display modes and BT.656
(8/10-bit), Y/C Video (16/20-bit), RAW Video (16/20-bit), and TSI (8-bit) capture modes.
Channel B supports: BT.656 (8/10-bit), RAW Video (8/10-bit) capture modes and can display synchronized RAW
Video data with Channel A.
The same STCLK signal is used for all three video ports (VP0, VP1, and VP2).
Figure 2-13. Video Port 1 Peripheral Signals
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
27
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
STCLK (C)
VP2CLK0
VP2CLK1
VP2CTL0
VP2CTL1
VP2CTL2
VP2D[0]
VP2D[1]
VP2D[2]
VP2D[3]
VP2D[4]
VP2D[5]
VP2D[6]
VP2D[7]
VP2D[8]
VP2D[9]
www.ti.com
Timing and
Control Logic
VP2D[10]
VP2D[11]
VP2D[12]
VP2D[13]
VP2D[14]
VP2D[15]
VP2D[16]
VP2D[17]
VP2D[18]
VP2D[19]
Capture/Display
Buffer
(2560 Bytes)
Channel A (A)
Channel B uses only
the VP2D[19:10]
bidirectional pins
Capture/Display
Buffer
(2560 Bytes)
Channel B (B)
Video Port 2 (VP2)
A.
B.
C.
Channel A supports: BT.656 (8/10-bit), Y/C Video (16/20-bit), RAW Video (16/20-bit) display modes and BT.656
(8/10-bit), Y/C Video (16/20-bit), RAW Video (16/20-bit) and TSI (8-bit) capture modes.
Channel B supports: BT.656 (8/10-bit), RAW Video (8/10-bit) capture modes and can display synchronized RAW
Video data with Channel A.
The same STCLK signal is used for all three video ports (VP0, VP1, and VP2).
Figure 2-14. Video Port 2 Peripheral Signals
28
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
(Transmit/Receive Data Pins)
(Transmit/Receive Data Pins)
VP1D[12]/AXR0[0]
VP1D[13]/AXR0[1]
VP1D[14]/AXR0[2]
VP1D[15]/AXR0[3]
VP1D[16]/AXR0[4]
VP1D[17]/AXR0[5]
VP1D[18]/AXR0[6]
VP1D[19]/AXR0[7]
8-Serial Ports
Flexible
Partitioning
Tx, Rx, OFF
(Transmit Bit Clock)
(Receive Bit Clock)
VP0D[12]/ACLKR0
VP0D[14]/AHCLKR0
Receive Clock
Generator
Transmit
Clock
Generator
(Receive Master Clock)
VP0D[13]/AFSR0
(Receive Frame Sync or
Left/Right Clock)
VP0D[17]/ACLKX0
VP0D[19]/AHCLKX0
(Transmit Master Clock)
Receive Clock
Check Circuit
Transmit
Clock Check
Circuit
Receive Frame
Sync
Transmit
Frame Sync
Error Detect (A)
Auto Mute
Logic
VP0D[18]/AFSX0
(Transmit Frame Sync or
Left/Right Clock)
VP0D[16]/AMUTE0
VP0D[15]/AMUTEIN0
McASP0
(Multichannel Audio Serial Port 0)
NOTES:
A.
On multiplexed pins, bolded text denotes the active function of the pin for that particular peripheral module.
Bolded and Italicized text within parentheses denotes the function of the pins in an audio system.
The McASPs' Error Detect function detects underruns, overruns, early/late frame syncs, DMA errors, and external
mute input.
Figure 2-15. McASP0 Peripheral Signals
2.5.3
Terminal Functions
Table 2-4, the terminal functions table, identifies the external signal names, the associated pin (ball)
numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type (I, O/Z, or I/O/Z), whether the pin
has any internal pullup/pulldown resistors and a functional pin description. For more detailed information
on device configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging considerations, see
the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
29
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
CLOCK/PLL CONFIGURATION
CLKIN
AC2
I
(3)
D6
I/O/Z
IPU
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be
programmed as a GP0 1 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT6/GP0[2] (3)
C6
I/O/Z
IPU
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be
programmed as a GP0 2 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKMODE1
AE4
I
IPD
CLKMODE0
AA2
I
IPD
PLLV (4)
V6
A (1)
TMS
E15
I
IPU
JTAG test-port mode select
TDO
B18
O/Z
IPU
JTAG test-port data out
TDI
A18
I
IPU
JTAG test-port data in
TCK
A16
I
IPU
JTAG test-port clock
TRST
D14
I
IPD
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG compatibility statement portion of this data sheet.
EMU11
D17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 11. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU10
C17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 10. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU9
B17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 9. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU8
D16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 8. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU7
A17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 7. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU6
C16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 6. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU5
B16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 5. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU4
D15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 4. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU3
C15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 3. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU2
B15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 2. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU1
C14
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 1
(5)
EMU0
A15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 0
(5)
RESET
P4
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]
Clock Input. This clock is the input to the on-chip PLL.
Clock mode select
•
Selects whether the CPU clock frequency = input clock frequency x1
(Bypass), x6, or x12.
For more details on the CLKMODE pins and the PLL multiply factors, see
the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
PLL voltage supply
JTAG EMULATION
RESETS, INTERRUPTS, AND GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUTS
I
Device reset
Nonmaskable interrupt, edge-driven (rising edge)
NMI
B4
I
IPD
Note: Any noise on the NMI pin may trigger an NMI interrupt; therefore, if the
NMI pin is not used, it is recommended that the NMI pin be grounded versus
relying on the IPD.
GP0[7]/EXT_INT7
E1
I/O/Z
IPU
GP0[6]/EXT_INT6
F2
I/O/Z
IPU
GP0[5]/EXT_INT5
F3
I/O/Z
IPU
GP0[4]/EXT_INT4
F4
I/O/Z
IPU
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) pins (I/O/Z) or external interrupts (input
only). The default after reset setting is GPIO enabled as input-only.
•
When these pins function as External Interrupts [by selecting the
corresponding interrupt enable register bit (IER.[7:4])], they are edge-driven
and the polarity can be independently selected via the External Interrupt
Polarity Register bits (EXTPOL.[3:0]).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
30
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the
opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated
1-kΩ resistor.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
(3)
GP0[15]/PRST
GP0[14]/PCLK
IPD/
IPU (2)
G3
(3)
(3)
G4
GP0[12]/PGNT
(3)
H4
GP0[11]/PREQ
(3)
F1
(3)
J2
GP0[9]/PIDSEL (3)
DESCRIPTION
General-purpose input/output (GP0) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I).
GP0 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I)
GP0 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z)
GP0 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I)
GP0 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z)
GP0 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z)
GP0 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I)
C1
GP0[13]/PINTA
GP0[10]/PCBE3
TYPE (1)
I/O/Z
Note: By default, no function is enabled upon reset. To configure these pins, see
the Device Configuration section of this data sheet.
K3
GP0 3 pin (I/O/Z)
Boot Configuration: PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI).
GP0[3]
L5
IPD
0 - PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled (default).
1 - PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled.
GP0[0]
M5
I/O/Z
IPD
General-purpose 0 pin (GP0[0]) (I/O/Z) [default]
This pin can be programmed as GPIO 0 (input only) [default] or as GP0[0]
(output only) pin or output as a general-purpose interrupt (GP0INT) signal
(output only).
Note: This pin must remain low during device reset.
VCXO Interpolated Control Port (VIC) single-bit digital-to-analog converter
(VDAC) output [output only] [default] or this pin can be programmed as a GP0 8
pin (I/O/Z)
Boot Configuration: PCI frequency selection (PCI66).
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66
(3)
AD1
I/O/Z
IPD
If the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN pin = 1), then:
0 - PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 - PCI operates at 33 MHz.
The –500 device supports PCI at 33 MHz only. For proper –500 device operation
when the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin must be pulled up
with a 1-kΩ resistor at device reset.
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin be must not
pulled up.
CLKOUT6/GP0[2] (6)
C6
I/O/Z
IPU
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be
programmed as a GP0 2 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT4/GP0[1] (6)
D6
I/O/Z
IPU
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be
programmed as a GP0 1 pin (I/O/Z).
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) or PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) or EMAC
PCI_EN
HINT/PFRAME
(6)
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HHWIL/PTRDY
HR/W/PCBE2
HAS/PPAR
(6)
(6)
(6)
HCS/PPERR
(6)
(6)
(6)
E2
I
N4
I/O/Z
Host interrupt from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI frame (I/O/Z)
P1
I/O/Z
Host control – selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or
PCI device select (I/O/Z).
R3
I/O/Z
Host control – selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or
PCI stop (I/O/Z)
N3
I/O/Z
Host half-word select – first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low
order)
[For HPI16 bus width selection only] (I) [default] or PCI target ready (I/O/Z)
M1
I/O/Z
Host read or write select (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 2 (I/O/Z)
P3
I/O/Z
R1
I/O/Z
Host
Host
Host
Host
HDS1/PSERR
(6)
R2
I/O/Z
HDS2/PCBE1
(6)
T2
I/O/Z
(6)
IPD
Boot Configuration: PCI enable pin (I)
The PCI_EN pin and the MAC_EN pin control the selection (enable/disable) of
the HPI, EMAC, MDIO, and GP0[15:8], or PCI peripherals. The pins work in
conjunction to enable/disable these peripherals (for more details, see the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet).
address strobe (I) [default] or PCI parity (I/O/Z)
chip select (I) [default] or PCI parity error (I/O/Z)
data strobe 1 (I) [default] or PCI system error (I/O/Z)
data strobe 2 (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 1 (I/O/Z)
Note: If unused, the following HPI control signals should be externally pulled
high.
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
31
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
HRDY/PIRDY
NO.
(6)
N1
HD31/AD31/MRCLK (6)
G1
HD30/AD30/MCRS (6)
H3
HD29/AD29/MRXER
(6)
J4
HD27/AD27/MRXD3 (6)
H2
HD26/AD26/MRXD2 (6)
J3
HD25/AD25/MRXD1 (6)
J1
HD24/AD24/MRXD0 (6)
K4
HD23/AD23 (6)
K1
HD22/AD22/MTCLK (6)
L4
HD21/AD21/MCOL (6)
K2
HD20/AD20/MTXEN (6)
L3
(6)
L2
HD18/AD18/MTXD2 (6)
M4
HD17/AD17/MTXD1
(6)
M2
HD16/AD16/MTXD0
(6)
M3
(6)
T3
HD14/AD14 (6)
U1
HD13/AD13 (6)
U3
(6)
U2
HD11/AD11 (6)
U4
HD10/AD10 (6)
V1
HD9/AD9 (6)
V3
HD15/AD15
HD12/AD12
HD8/AD8 (6)
V2
HD7/AD7 (6)
W2
HD6/AD6 (6)
W4
HD5/AD5 (6)
Y1
HD4/AD4 (6)
W3
HD3/AD3 (6)
Y2
HD2/AD2
(6)
IPD/
IPU (2)
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
Host ready from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI initiator ready (I/O/Z).
G2
HD28/AD28/MRXDV (6)
HD19/AD19/MTXD3
TYPE (1)
Host-port data (I/O/Z) [default] or PCI data-address bus (I/O/Z) or EMAC
transmit/receive or control pins
As HPI data bus (PCI_EN pin = 0)
•
Used for transfer of data, address, and control
•
Host-Port bus width user-configurable at device reset via a 10-kΩ resistor
pullup/pulldown resistor on the HD5 pin:
As PCI data-address bus (PCI_EN pin = 1)
•
Used for transfer of data and address
Boot Configuration:
•
HD5 pin = 0: HPI operates as an HPI16.
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining
HD[31:16] pins are reserved pins in the high-impedance state.)
•
HD5 pin = 1: HPI operates as an HPI32.
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)
I/O/Z
For superset devices like DM642, the HD31/AD31 through HD16/AD16 pins can
also function as EMAC transmit/receive or control pins (when PCI_EN pin = 0;
MAC_EN pin = 1). For more details on the EMAC pin functions, see the Ethernet
MAC (EMAC) peripheral section of this table and for more details on how to
configure the EMAC pin functions, see the device configuration section of this
data sheet.
Y4
HD1/AD1 (6)
AA1
HD0/AD0 (6)
Y3
PCBE0
V4
I/O/Z
XSP_CS
T4
O
IPD
PCI serial interface chip select (O).
When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is tied-off.
XSP_CLK/MDCLK (7)
R5
I/O/Z
IPD
PCI serial interface clock (O) [default] or MDIO serial clock input/output (I/O/Z).
XSP_DI
R4
I
IPU
PCI serial interface data in (I) [default].
In PCI mode, this pin is connected to the output data pin of the serial PROM.
XSP_DO/MDIO (7)
P5
I/O/Z
IPU
PCI serial interface data out (O) [default] or MDIO serial data input/output
(I/O/Z). In PCI mode, this pin is connected to the input data pin of the serial
PROM.
(7)
32
PCI command/byte enable 0 (I/O/Z).
When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is tied-off.
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
(7)
GP0[15]/PRST
GP0[14]/PCLK
NO.
(7)
(7)
G4
GP0[12]/PGNT
H4
GP0[11]/PREQ
(7)
F1
(7)
(7)
GP0[3]
I/O/Z
J2
Note: By default, no function is enabled upon reset. To configure these pins, see
the Device Configuration section of this data sheet.
K3
L5
DESCRIPTION
General-purpose input/output (GP0) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I).
GP0 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I)
GP0 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z)
GP0 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I)
GP0 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z)
GP0 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z)
GP0 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I)
C1
(7)
GP0[9]/PIDSEL
IPD/
IPU (2)
G3
GP0[13]/PINTA
GP0[10]/PCBE3
TYPE (1)
I/O/Z
IPD
GP0 3 pin (I/O/Z)
Boot Configuration: PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI).
0 - PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled (default).
1 - PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled
VCXO Interpolated Control Port (VIC) single-bit digital-to-analog converter
(VDAC) output [output only] [default] or this pin can be programmed as a GP0 8
pin (I/O/Z)
Boot Configuration: PCI frequency selection (PCI66).
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66
(7)
AD1
I/O/Z
IPD
If the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN pin = 1), then:
0 - PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 - PCI operates at 33 MHz.
The –500 device supports PCI at 33 MHz only. For proper –500 device operation
when the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin must be pulled up
with a 1-kΩ resistor at device reset.
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be
pulled up.
EMIFA (64-bit) – CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY
ACE3
L26
O/Z
IPU
ACE2
K23
O/Z
IPU
ACE1
K24
O/Z
IPU
ACE0
K25
O/Z
IPU
ABE7
T22
O/Z
IPU
ABE6
T23
O/Z
IPU
ABE5
R25
O/Z
IPU
ABE4
R26
O/Z
IPU
ABE3
M25
O/Z
IPU
ABE2
M26
O/Z
IPU
ABE1
L23
O/Z
IPU
ABE0
L24
O/Z
IPU
APDT
M22
O/Z
IPU
AHOLDA
N22
O
IPU
EMIFA hold-request-acknowledge to the host
AHOLD
W24
I
IPU
EMIFA hold request from the host
ABUSREQ
P22
O
IPU
EMIFA bus request output
EMIFA memory space enables
•
Enabled by bits 28 through 31 of the word address
•
Only one pin is asserted during any external data access
EMIFA byte-enable control
•
Decoded from the low-order address bits. The number of address bits or
byte enables used depends on the width of external memory.
•
Byte-write enables for most types of memory
•
Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)
EMIFA peripheral data transfer, allows direct transfer between external
peripherals
EMIFA (64-bit) – BUS ARBITRATION
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
33
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-bit) – ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL
AECLKIN
H25
I
IPD
EMIFA external input clock. The EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or
CPU/6 clock) is selected at reset via the pullup/pulldown resistors on the
AEA[20:19] pins.
AECLKIN is the default for the EMIFA input clock.
AECLKOUT2
J23
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA output clock 2. Programmable to be EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN,
CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) frequency divided-by-1, -2, or -4.
AECLKOUT1
J26
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA output clock 1 [at EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6
clock) frequency].
AARE/
ASDCAS/
ASADS/ASRE
J25
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory read-enable/SDRAM column-address
strobe/programmable synchronous interface-address strobe or read-enable
•
For programmable synchronous interface, the RENEN field in the CE Space
Secondary Control Register (CExSEC) selects between ASADS and ASRE:
If RENEN = 0, then the ASADS/ASRE signal functions as the ASADS signal.
If RENEN = 1, then the ASADS/ASRE signal functions as the ASRE signal.
AAOE/
ASDRAS/
ASOE
J24
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory output-enable/SDRAM row-address
strobe/programmable synchronous interface output-enable
AAWE/
ASDWE/
ASWE
K26
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory write-enable/SDRAM write-enable/programmable
synchronous interface write-enable
ASDCKE
L25
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA SDRAM clock-enable (used for self-refresh mode).
•
If SDRAM is not in system, ASDCKE can be used as a general-purpose
output.
ASOE3
R22
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA synchronous memory output-enable for ACE3 (for glueless FIFO
interface)
AARDY
L22
I
IPU
Asynchronous memory ready input
EMIFA (64-bit) – ADDRESS
AEA22
U23
AEA21
V24
AEA20
V25
AEA19
V26
AEA18
V23
AEA17
U24
AEA16
U25
AEA15
U26
AEA14
T24
AEA13
T25
AEA12
R23
AEA11
R24
AEA10
P23
AEA9
P24
AEA8
P26
AEA7
N23
AEA6
N24
AEA5
N26
AEA4
M23
AEA3
M24
34
EMIFA external address (doubleword address)
EMIFA address numbering for the DM642 device starts with AEA3 to maintain
signal name compatibility with other C64x™ devices (e.g., C6414, C6415, and
C6416) [see the 64-bit EMIF addressing scheme in the TMS320C6000 DSP
External Memory Interface (EMIF) Reference Guide (literature number
SPRU266)].
O/Z
IPD
Boot Configuration:
•
Controls initialization of DSP modes at reset (I) via pullup/pulldown resistors
– Boot mode (AEA[22:21]):
00 - No boot (default mode)
01 - HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)
10 - Reserved
11 - EMIFA boot
– EMIF clock select (AEA[20:19]):
Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 - AECLKIN (default mode)
01 - CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 - CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 - Reserved
For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-bit) – DATA
AED63
AF24
AED62
AF23
AED61
AE23
AED60
AD23
AED59
AD22
AED58
AE22
AED57
AD21
AED56
AE21
AED55
AC21
AED54
AF21
AED53
AD20
AED52
AE20
AED51
AC20
AED50
AF20
AED49
AC19
AED48
AD19
AED47
W23
AED46
Y26
AED45
Y23
AED44
Y25
AED43
Y24
AED42
AA26
AED41
AA23
AED40
AA25
AED39
AA24
AED38
AB23
AED37
AB25
AED36
AB24
AED35
AC26
AED34
AC25
AED33
AD25
AED32
AD26
AED31
C26
AED30
C25
AED29
D26
AED28
D25
AED27
E24
AED26
E25
AED25
F24
AED24
F25
AED23
F23
AED22
F26
AED21
G24
AED20
G25
I/O/Z
IPU
EMIFA external data
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
35
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
AED19
G23
AED18
G26
AED17
H23
AED16
H24
AED15
C19
AED14
D19
AED13
A20
AED12
D20
AED11
B20
AED10
C20
AED9
A21
AED8
D21
AED7
B21
AED6
C21
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
I/O/Z
IPU
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA external data
AED5
A23
AED4
C22
AED3
B22
AED2
B23
AED1
A24
AED0
B24
XSP_CLK/MDCLK(3)
R5
I/O/Z
IPD
PCI serial interface clock (O) [default] or MDIO serial clock input/output (I/O/Z).
XSP_DO/MDIO(3)
P5
I/O/Z
IPU
PCI serial interface data out (O) [default] or MDIO serial data input/output
(I/O/Z). In PCI mode, this pin is connected to the input data pin of the serial
PROM.
MANAGEMENT DATA INPUT/OUTPUT (MDIO)
VCXO INTERPOLATED CONTROL PORT (VIC)
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66 (3)
AD1
I/O/Z
IPD
VCXO Interpolated Control Port (VIC) single-bit digital-to-analog converter
(VDAC) output [output only] [default] or this pin can be programmed as a GP0 8
pin (I/O/Z)
Boot Configuration: PCI frequency selection (PCI66).
If the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN pin = 1), then:
0 - PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 - PCI operates at 33 MHz.
The –500 device supports PCI at 33 MHz only. For proper –500 device operation
when the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin must be pulled up
with a 1-kΩ resistor at device reset.
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be
pulled up.
VIDEO PORTS (VP0, VP1, AND VP2)
STCLK
36
AC1
I
IPD
The STCLK signal drives the hardware counter on the video ports.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
VIDEO PORT 2 (VP2)
VP2D[19]
E13
VP2D[18]
E12
VP2D[17]
D12
VP2D[16]
C12
VP2D[15]
B12
VP2D[14]
E11
VP2D[13]
D11
VP2D[12]
C11
VP2D[11]
B11
VP2D[10]
A11
VP2D[9]
D10
VP2D[8]
C10
VP2D[7]
B10
VP2D[6]
A10
VP2D[5]
D9
VP2D[4]
C9
VP2D[3]
B9
VP2D[2]
A9
VP2D[1]
D8
Video port 2 (VP2) data input/output (I/O/Z)
I/O/Z
IPD
Note: By default, no function is enabled upon reset. To configure these pins, see
the Device Configuration section of this data sheet.
VP2D[0]
C8
VP2CLK1
A13
I/O/Z
IPD
VP2 clock 1 (I/O/Z)
VP2CLK0
A7
I
IPD
VP2 clock 0 (I)
VP2CTL2
C7
VP2CTL1
D7
I/O/Z
IPD
VP2CTL0
B8
VP2 control 2 (I/O/Z)
VP2 control 1 (I/O/Z)
VP2 control 0 (I/O/Z)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
37
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
VIDEO PORT 1 (VP1) OR McASP0 DATA OR McBSP1
VP1D[19]/AXR0[7](3)
AB12
VP1D[18]/AXR0[6](3)
AB11
(3)
VP1D[17]/AXR0[5]
AC11
VP1D[16]/AXR0[4](3)
AD11
VP1D[15]/AXR0[3](3)
AE11
(3)
VP1D[14]/AXR0[2]
AC10
VP1D[13]/AXR0[1](3)
AD10
VP1D[12]/AXR0[0](3)
AC9
VP1D[11]
AD9
VP1D[10]
AE9
VP1D[9]
AC8
VP1D[8]/CLKR1(3)
(3)
I/O/Z
IPD
AD8
VP1D[7]/FSR1
AC7
VP1D[6]/DR1(3)
AD7
VP1D[5]/CLKS1(3)
AE7
(3)
Video port 1 (VP1) data input/output (I/O/Z) or McASP0 data pins (I/O/Z)
[default] and Video port 1 (VP1) data input/output (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 data
input/output (I/O/Z) [default]
VP1D[4]/DX1
AC6
VP1D[3]/FSX1(3)
AD6
VP1D[2]/CLKX1(3)
AE6
VP1D[1]
AF6
By default, standalone VP1 data input/output pins have no function enabled
upon reset. To configure these pins, see the Device Configuration section of this
data sheet.
For more details on the McBSP1 pin functions or the McASP0 data pin functions,
see McBSP1 or McASP0 data sections of this table and the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet.
VP1D[0]
AF5
VP1CLK1
AF10
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1 clock 1 (I/O/Z)
VP1CLK0
AF8
I
IPD
VP1 clock 0 (I)
VP1CTL2
AD5
VP1CTL1
AE5
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1CTL0
AF4
38
VP1 control 2 (I/O/Z)
VP1 control 1 (I/O/Z)
VP1 control 0 (I/O/Z)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
VP0D[19]/AHCLKX0(3)
AC12
VP0D[18]/AFSX0(3)
AD12
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
VIDEO PORT 0 (VP0) OR McASP0 CONTROL OR McBSP0
(3)
VP0D[17]/ACLKX0
AB13
VP0D[16]/AMUTE0(3)
AC13
VP0D[15]/
AMUTEIN0(3)
AD13
VP0D[14]/AHCLKR0(3)
AB14
VP0D[13]/AFSR0(3)
AC14
VP0D[12]/ACLKR0(3)
AD14
VP0D[11]
AB15
VP0D[10]
AC15
VP0D[9]
Video port 0 (VP0) data input/output (I/O/Z) or McASP0 control pins (I/O/Z)
[default] and Video port 0 (VP0) data input/output (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 data
input/output (I/O/Z) [default]
I/O/Z
IPD
AD15
(3)
VP0D[8]/CLKR0
AE15
VP0D[7]/FSR0(3)
AB16
VP0D[6]/DR0(3)
AC16
(3)
By default, standalone VP0 data input/output pins have no function enabled
upon reset. To configure these pins, see the Device Configuration section of this
data sheet.
For more details on the McBSP0 pin functions or the McASP0 control pin
functions, see McBSP0 or McASP0 control sections of this table and the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet.
VP0D[5]/CLKS0
AD16
VP0D[4]/DX0(3)
AE16
VP0D[3]/FSX0(3)
AF16
VP0D[2]/CLKX0(3)
AF17
VP0D[1]
AE18
VP0D[0]
AF18
VP0CLK1
AF12
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 clock 1 (I/O/Z)
VP0CLK0
AF14
I
IPD
VP0 clock 0 (I)
VP0CTL2
AD17
VP0CTL1
AC17
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0CTL0
AE17
VP0 control 2 (I/O/Z)
VP0 control 1 (I/O/Z)
VP0control 0 (I/O/Z)
TIMER 2
–
No external pins. The timer 2 peripheral pins are not pinned out as external pins.
TIMER 1
TOUT1
B5
O/Z
IPU
Timer 1 output (O/Z)
Boot Configuration: Device endian mode [LENDIAN] (I)
Controls initialization of DSP modes at reset via pullup/pulldown resistors
•
Device Endian mode
0 - Big Endian
1 - Little Endian (default)
For more details on LENDIAN, see the Device Configurations section of this data
sheet.
TINP1
A5
I
IPD
Timer 1 or general-purpose input
TIMER 0
TOUT0
C5
O/Z
IPD
Timer 0 output (O/Z)
Boot Configuration: MAC enable pin [MAC_EN] (I)
The PCI_EN and the MAC_EN pin control the selection (enable/disable) of the
HPI, EMAC, MDIO, and GP0[15:9], or PCI peripherals. The pins work in
conjunction to enable/disable these peripherals.
For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
TINP0
A4
I
IPD
Timer 0 or general-purpose input
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
39
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 0 (I2C0)
SCL0
E4
I/O/Z
—
I2C0 clock.
SDA0
D3
I/O/Z
—
I2C0 data.
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1)
VP1D[8]/CLKR1
AD8
I/O/Z
IPD
Video Port 1 (VP1) input/output data 8 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 receive clock
(I/O/Z) [default]
VP1D[7]/FSR1(3)
AC7
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1 input/output data 7 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 receive frame sync (I/O/Z)
[default]
VP1D[6]/DR1(3)
AD7
I
IPD
VP1 input/output data 6 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 receive data (I) [default]
VP1D[5]/CLKS1(3)
AE7
I
IPD
VP1 input/output data 5 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 external clock source (I) (as
opposed to internal) [default]
VP1D[4]/DX1(3)
AC6
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1 input/output data 4 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 transmit data (O/Z) [default]
VP1D[3]/FSX1(3)
AD6
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1 input/output data 3 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z)
[default]
VP1D[2]/CLKX1(3)
AE6
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1 input/output data 2 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP1 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default]
(3)
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 0 (McBSP0)
VP0D[8]/CLKR0(3)
AE15
I/O/Z
IPD
Video Port 0 (VP0) input/output data 8 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 receive clock
(I/O/Z) [default]
VP0D[7]/FSR0(3)
AB16
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 7 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 receive frame sync (I/O/Z)
[default]
VP0D[6]/DR0(3)
AC16
I
IPD
VP0 input/output data 6 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 receive data (I) [default]
VP0D[5]/CLKS0(3)
AD16
I
IPD
VP0 input/output data 5 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 external clock source (I) (as
opposed to internal) [default]
VP0D[4]/DX0(3)
AE16
O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 4 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 transmit data (O/Z) [default]
VP0D[3]/FSX0(3)
AF16
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 3 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z)
[default]
VP0D[2]/CLKX0(3)
AF17
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 2 pin (I/O/Z) or McBSP0 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default]
40
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
NAME
NO.
HD31/AD31/MRCLK(3)
G1
I
HD30/AD30/MCRS(3)
H3
I
HD29/AD29/MRXER(3)
G2
I
HD28/AD28/MRXDV(3)
J4
I
HD27/AD27/MRXD3(3)
H2
I
(3)
HD26/AD26/MRXD2
J3
I
HD25/AD25/MRXD1(3)
J1
I
HD24/AD24/MRXD0(3)
K4
I
HD22/AD22/MTCLK(3)
L4
I
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
ETHERNET MAC (EMAC)
(3)
HD21/AD21/MCOL
K2
I
HD20/AD20/MTXEN(3)
L3
O/Z
HD19/AD19/MTXD3(3)
L2
O/Z
(3)
HD18/AD18/MTXD2
M4
O/Z
HD17/AD17/MTXD1(3)
M2
O/Z
HD16/AD16/MTXD0(3)
M3
O/Z
Host-port data (I/O/Z) [default] or EMAC transmit/receive or control pins (I) (O/Z)
HPI pin functions are default, see the Device Configurations section of this data
sheet. EMAC Media Independent I/F (MII) data, clocks, and control pins for
Transmit/Receive.
•
MII transmit clock (MTCLK),
Transmit clock source from the attached PHY.
•
MII transmit data (MTXD[3:0]),
Transmit data nibble synchronous with transmit clock (MTCLK).
•
MII transmit enable (MTXEN),
This signal indicates a valid transmit data on the transmit data pins
(MTDX[3:0]).
•
MII collision sense (MCOL)
Assertion of this signal during half-duplex operation indicates network
collision.
During full-duplex operation, transmission of new frames will not begin if this
pin is asserted.
•
MII carrier sense (MCRS)
Indicates a frame carrier signal is being received.
•
MII receive data (MRXD[3:0]),
Receive data nibble synchronous with receive clock (MRCLK).
•
MII receive clock (MRCLK),
Receive clock source from the attached PHY.
•
MII receive data valid (MRXDV),
This signal indicates a valid data nibble on the receive data pins
(MRDX[3:0]) and
•
MII receive error (MRXER),
Indicates reception of a coding error on the receive data.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
41
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT 0 (McASP0) CONTROL
VP0D[19]/AHCLKX0
AC12
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 19 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 transmit high-frequency master
clock (I/O/Z).
VP0D[18]/AFSX0(3)
AD12
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 18 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 transmit frame sync or left/right
clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
VP0D[17]/ACLKX0(3)
AB13
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 17 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 transmit bit clock (I/O/Z).
VP0D[16]/AMUTE0(3)
AC13
O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 16 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 mute output (O/Z).
VP0D[15]/
AMUTEIN0(3)
AD13
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 15 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 mute input (I/O/Z).
VP0D[14]/AHCLKR0(3)
AB14
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 14 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 receive high-frequency master
clock (I/O/Z).
VP0D[13]/AFSR0(3)
AC14
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 13 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 receive frame sync or left/right
clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
VP0D[12]/ACLKR0(3)
AD14
I/O/Z
IPD
VP0 input/output data 12 pin (I/O/Z) or McASP0 receive bit clock (I/O/Z).
VP1D[19]/AXR0[7](3)
AB12
VP1D[18]/AXR0[6](3)
AB11
(3)
VP1D[17]/AXR0[5]
AC11
VP1D[16]/AXR0[4](3)
AD11
VP1D[15]/AXR0[3](3)
AE11
VP1D[14]/AXR0[2](3)
AC10
VP1D[13]/AXR0[1](3)
AD10
VP1D[12]/AXR0[0](3)
AC9
(3)
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT 0 (McASP0) DATA
I/O/Z
IPD
VP1 input/output data pins [19:12] (I/O/Z) or McASP0 TX/RX data pins [7:0]
(I/O/Z) [default].
RESERVED FOR TEST
RSV07
H7
A
—
Reserved. This pin must be connected directly to CVDD for proper device
operation.
RSV08
R6
A
—
Reserved. This pin must be connected directly to DVDD for proper device
operation.
RSV05
E14
I
IPD
RSV06
W7
A
—
RSV00
AA3
A
—
RSV01
AB3
I
—
RSV02
AC4
O/Z
—
RSV03
AD3
O/Z
—
RSV04
AF3
O
IPU
42
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground. If the signal
must be routed out from the device, the internal pull-up/down resistance should
not be relied upon and an external pull-up/down should be used.)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS
A2
A25
B1
B2
B14
B25
B26
C3
C24
D4
D23
E5
E7
E8
E10
E17
E19
E20
E22
F9
F12
DVDD
F15
F18
S
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
G5
G22
H5
H22
J6
J21
K5
K22
M6
M21
N2
P25
R21
U5
U22
V21
W5
W22
W25
Y5
Y22
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
43
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
AA9
AA12
AA15
AA18
AB5
AB7
AB8
AB10
AB17
AB19
DVDD
AB20
S
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
AB22
AC23
AD24
AE1
AE2
AE13
AE25
AE26
AF2
AF25
44
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
F6
F7
F20
F21
G6
G7
G8
G10
G11
G13
G14
G16
G17
G19
G20
G21
H20
K7
K20
L7
L20
M12
CVDD
M14
S
N7
1.2-V supply voltage (-500 device)
1.4 V supply voltage (A-500, A-600, -600, -720 devices)
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
N13
N15
N20
P7
P12
P14
P20
R13
R15
T7
T20
U7
U20
W20
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y10
Y11
Y13
Y14
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
45
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
Y16
Y17
Y19
Y20
CVDD
Y21
S
AA6
1.2-V supply voltage (-500 device)
1.4 V supply voltage (A-500, A-600, -600, -720 devices)
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
AA7
AA20
AA21
GROUND PINS
A1
A3
A6
A8
A12
A14
A19
A22
A26
B3
B6
B7
B13
B19
C2
C4
C13
VSS
C18
GND
Ground pins
C23
D1
D2
D5
D13
D18
D22
D24
E3
E6
E9
E16
E18
E21
E23
E26
F5
46
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
F8
F10
F11
F13
F14
F16
F17
F19
F22
G9
G12
G15
G18
H1
H6
H21
H26
J5
J7
J20
J22
K6
VSS
K21
GND
Ground pins
L1
L6
L21
M7
M13
M15
M20
N5
N6
N12
N14
N21
N25
P2
P6
P13
P15
P21
R7
R12
R14
R20
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
47
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
T1
T5
T6
T21
T26
U6
U21
V5
V7
V20
V22
W1
W6
W21
W26
Y9
Y12
Y15
Y18
AA4
AA5
AA8
VSS
AA10
GND
Ground pins
AA11
AA13
AA14
AA16
AA17
AA19
AA22
AB1
AB2
AB4
AB6
AB9
AB18
AB21
AB26
AC3
AC5
AC18
AC22
AC24
AD2
AD4
48
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 2-4. Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
IPD/
IPU (2)
DESCRIPTION
AD18
AE3
AE8
AE10
AE12
AE14
AE19
AE24
VSS
AF1
GND
Ground pins
AF7
AF9
AF11
AF13
AF15
AF19
AF22
AF26
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
49
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
2.6
2.6.1
www.ti.com
Development
Development Support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000™ DSP platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of C6000™ DSP-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS™), which provides the basic run-time target
software needed to support any DSP application.
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator (supports C6000™ DSP multiprocessor system debug)
EVM (Evaluation Module)
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C6000™ DSP platform, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
50
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
2.6.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Device Support
2.6.2.1
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
DSP devices and support tools. Each DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX,
TMP, or TMS (e.g., TMS 320DM642AGDKA5). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible
prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of
product development from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production
devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification
TMS
Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following
disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are
to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, GDK), the temperature range (for example, “A” is the extended temperature
range), and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, 5 is 500 MHz). Figure 2-16 provides a
legend for reading the complete device name for any TMS320C6000™ DSP platform member.
The ZDK package, like the GDK package, is a 548-ball plastic BGA only with Pb-free balls. The ZNZ is the
Pb-free package version of the GNZ package.
For device part numbers and further ordering information for TMS320DM642 in the GDK, GNZ, ZDK, and
ZNZ package types, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com) or contact your TI sales representative.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
51
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
TMS 320 DM642A GDK
PREFIX
TMX = Experimental device
TMP = Prototype device
TMS = Qualified device
SMX= Experimental device, MIL
SMJ = MIL-PRF-38535, QML
SM = High Rel (non-38535)
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320
DSP family
A
5
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
500 (500-MHz CPU, 100-MHz EMIF, 33-MHz PCI)
600 (600-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIF, 66-MHz PCI)
720 (720-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIF, 66-MHz PCI)
5 (500-MHz CPU, 100-MHz EMIF, 33-MHz PCI)
6 (600-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIF, 66-MHz PCI)
7 (720-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIF, 66-MHz PCI)
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 90°C)(A)
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, commercial temperature
A
= −40°C to 105°C, extended temperature
PACKAGE TYPE(B)(C)
GDK = 548-pin plastic BGA
GNZ = 548-pin plastic BGA
ZDK = 548-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-free soldered balls
ZNZ = 548-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-free soldered balls
DEVICE(D)
DM64x DSP:
642
642A
A.
B.
C.
D.
(Silicon Revision 1.2 and1.1)
(Silicon Revision 2.0)
The extended temperature "A version" devices may have different operating conditions than the commercial
temperature devices. For more details, see the recommended operating conditions portion of this data sheet.
BGA = Ball Grid Array
The ZDK and ZNZ mechanical package designators represent the version of the GDK and GNZ packages,
respectively, with Pb-free balls. For more detailed information, see the Mechanical Data section of this document.
For actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI website (www.ti.com).
Figure 2-16. TMS320DM64x™ DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the TMS320DM642 Device)
2.6.2.2
Documentation Support
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320™ DSP family generations of devices from product
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data
sheets, such as this document, with design specifications; complete user's reference guides for all devices
and tools; technical briefs; development-support tools; on-line help; and hardware and software
applications. The following is a brief, descriptive list of support documentation specific to the C6000™
DSP devices:
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189) describes the
C6000™ DSP CPU (core) architecture, instruction set, pipeline, and associated interrupts.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190) provides
an overview and briefly describes the functionality of the peripherals available on the C6000™ DSP
platform of devices. This document also includes a table listing the peripherals available on the C6000
devices along with literature numbers and hyperlinks to the associated peripheral documents.
The TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395) gives an introduction to the C64x™
digital signal processor, and discusses the application areas that are enhanced by the C64x™ DSP
VelociTI.2™ VLIW architecture.
The TMS320C64x DSP Video Port/VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC) Port Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU629) describes the functionality of the Video Port and VIC Port peripherals.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) Reference Guide (literature number
SPRU041) describes the functionality of the McASP peripheral.
TMS320C6000 DSP Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU175)
describes the functionality of the I2C peripheral.
52
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)/ Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU628) describes the functionality of the EMAC and MDIO
peripherals.
TMS320DM642 Technical Overview (literature number SPRU615) describes the TMS320DM642
architecture including details of its peripherals. This document also shows several example applications
such as using the DM642 device in development of IP phones, video-on-demand set-top boxes, and
surveillance digital video recorders.
The TMS320DM642 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ196) describes the
known exceptions to the functional specifications for particular silicon revisions of the TMS320DM642
device.
The TMS320DM64x Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA962)
discusses the power consumption for user applications with the TMS320DM642 DSP devices.
The TMS320DM642 Hardware Designer’s Resource Guide (literature number SPRAA51) is organized by
development flow and functional areas to make design efforts as seamless as possible. This document
includes getting started, board design, system testing, and checklists to aid in initial designs and debug
efforts. Each section of this document includes pointers to valuable information including: technical
documentation, models, symbols, and reference designs for use in each phase of design. Particular
attention is given to peripheral interfacing and system-level design concerns.
The Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839) describes how
to properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system.
The tools support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated
Development Environment (IDE). For a complete listing of C6000™ DSP latest documentation, visit the
Texas Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL).
2.6.2.3
Device Silicon Revision
The device silicon revision can be determined by the "Die PG code" marked on the top of the package.
For more detailed information on the DM642 silicon revision, package markings, and the known
exceptions to the functional specifications as well as any usage notes, refer to the device-specific silicon
errata: TMS320DM642 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ196).
Device Overview
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
53
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
3 Device Configurations
On the DM642 device, bootmode and certain device configurations/peripheral selections are determined at
device reset, while other device configurations/peripheral selections are software-configurable via the
peripheral configurations register (PERCFG) [address location 0x01B3F000] after device reset.
3.1
Configurations at Reset
For DM642 proper device operation, GP0[0] (pin M5) must remain low, do not oppose the internal
pulldown (IPD).
3.1.1
Peripheral Selection at Device Reset
Some DM642 peripherals share the same pins (internally muxed) and are mutually exclusive (i.e., HPI,
general-purpose input/output pins GP0[15:9], PCI and its internal EEPROM, EMAC, and MDIO). Other
DM642 peripherals (i.e., the Timers, I2C0, and the GP0[7:0] pins), are always available.
• HPI, GP0[15:9], PCI, EEPROM (internal to PCI), EMAC, and MDIO peripherals
The PCI_EN and MAC_EN pins are latched at reset. They determine specific peripheral selection,
summarized in Table 3-1. For further clarification of the HPI vs. EMAC configuration, see Table 3-2.
Table 3-1. PCI_EN, HD5, and MAC_EN Peripheral Selection (HPI, GP0[15:9], PCI, EMAC, and MDIO)
PERIPHERAL SELECTION
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
PCI_EN
Pin [E2]
PCI_EEAI
Pin [L5]
HD5
Pin [Y1]
MAC_EN
Pin [C5]
HPI Data
Lower
HPI Data
Upper
32-Bit PCI
EEPROM
(Auto-Init)
EMAC and
MDIO
GP0[15:9]
0
0
0
0
√
Hi-Z
Disabled
N/A
Disabled
√
0
0
0
1
√
Hi-Z
Disabled
N/A
√
√
0
0
1
0
√
√
Disabled
N/A
Disabled
√
0
0
1
1
Disabled
Disabled
N/A
√
√
1
1
X
X
Disabled
√
Enabled
(via External
EEPROM)
Disabled
Disabled
1
0
X
X
Disabled
√
Disabled
(default values)
Disabled
Disabled
•
If the PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the HPI peripheral is enabled and based on the HD5 and
MAC_EN pin configuration at reset, HPI16 mode or EMAC and MDIO can be selected. When the PCI
is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the GP0[15:9] pins can also be programmed as GPIO, provided the GPxEN
and GPxDIR bits are properly configured.
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as HPI and all standalone PCI pins (PCBE0 and
XSP_CS) are tied-off (Hi-Z). Also, the multiplexed GP0/PCI pins can be used as GPIO with the proper
software configuration of the GPIO enable and direction registers (for more details, see Table 3-8).
If the PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), the HPI peripheral is disabled.
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as PCI. Also, the multiplexed GP0/PCI pins function
as PCI pins (for more details, see Table 3-8).
The MAC_EN pin, in combination with the PCI_EN and HD5 pins, controls the selection of the EMAC
and MDIO peripherals (for more details, see Table 3-2).
The PCI_EN pin (= 1) and the PCI_EEAI pin control the whether the PCI initializes its internal registers
via external EEPROM (PCI_EEAI = 1) or if the internal default values are used instead
(PCI_EEAI = 0).
•
•
•
Table 3-2. HPI vs. EMAC Peripheral Pin Selection
CONFIGURATION SELECTION
(1)
GP0[0] (Pin [M5])
HD5 (Pin [Y1])
MAC_EN (Pin [C5])
HD[15:0]
HD[31:16]
0
0
HPI16
Hi-Z
0
54
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 3-2. HPI vs. EMAC Peripheral Pin Selection (continued)
CONFIGURATION SELECTION
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
GP0[0] (Pin [M5])(1)
HD5 (Pin [Y1])
MAC_EN (Pin [C5])
HD[15:0]
0
0
1
HPI16
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
3.1.2
HD[31:16]
used for EMAC
HPI32 (HD[31:0])
Hi-Z
used for EMAC
(1) Invalid configuration. The GP0[0] pin must remain low during
device reset.
Device Configuration at Device Reset
Table 3-3 describes the DM642 device configuration pins, which are set up via external pullup/pulldown
resistors through the specified EMIFA address bus pins (AEA[22:19]), and the TOUT1/LENDIAN,
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, and the HD5 pins (all of which are latched during device reset).
Table 3-3. DM642 Device Configuration Pins (TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI,
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66, HD5/AD5, PCI_EN, and MAC_EN)
CONFIGURATION
PIN
NO.
TOUT1/LENDIAN
B5
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Device Endian mode (LEND)
0 - System operates in Big Endian mode
1 - System operates in Little Endian mode (default)
Bootmode [1:0]
AEA[22:21]
[U23,
V24]
00
01
10
11
- No boot (default mode)
- HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)
- Reserved
- EMIFA boot
EMIFA input clock select
Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
AEA[20:19]
[V25,
V26]
00
01
10
11
- AECLKIN (default mode)
- CPU/4 Clock Rate
- CPU/6 Clock Rate
- Reserved
PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (PCIEEAI)
PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
L5
0 - PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled; the PCI peripheral uses the specified PCI
default values (default).
1 - PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled; the PCI peripheral is configured through
EEPROM provided the PCI peripheral pin is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).
PCI frequency selection (PCI66) [PCI peripheral needs be enabled (PCI_EN = 1) to use this function]
Selects the PCI operating frequency of 66 MHz or 33 MHz PCI operating frequency is selected at reset
via the pullup/pulldown resistor on the PCI66 pin:
VDAC/GP0[8]/ PCI66
AD1
0 - PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 - PCI operates at 33 MHz.
The -500 speed device supports PCI at 33 MHz only. For proper -500 device operation when the PCI is
enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin must be pulled up with a 1-kΩ resistor at device reset.
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
HPI peripheral bus width (HPI_WIDTH)
HD5/AD5
Y1
0 - HPI operates as an HPI16.
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are reserved pins in
the Hi-Z state.)
1 - HPI operates as an HPI32.
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)
(Also see the PCI_EN; TOUT0/MAC_EN functional description in this table)
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
55
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-3. DM642 Device Configuration Pins (TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI,
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66, HD5/AD5, PCI_EN, and MAC_EN) (continued)
CONFIGURATION
PIN
NO.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Peripheral Selection
PCI_EN;
TOUT0/MAC_EN
3.2
[E2; C5]
00
01
10
11
- HPI (default mode) [HPI32, if HD5 = 1; HPI16 if HD5 = 0
- EMAC and MDIO; HPI16, if HD5 = 0; HPI disabled, if HD5 = 1
- PCI
- Reserved
Configurations After Reset
3.2.1
Peripheral Selection After Device Reset
Video Ports, McBSP1, McBSP0, McASP0 and I2C0
The DM642 device has designated registers for peripheral configuration (PERCFG), device status
(DEVSTAT), and JTAG identification (JTAGID). These registers are part of the Device Configuration
module and are mapped to a 4K block memory starting at 0x01B3F000. The CPU accesses these
registers via the CFGBUS.
The peripheral configuration register (PERCFG), allows the user to control the peripheral selection of the
Video Ports (VP0, VP1, VP2) McBSP0, McBSP1, McASP0, and I2C0 peripherals. For more detailed
information on the PERCFG register control bits, see Figure 3-1 and Table 3-4.
31
24
Reserved
R-0
23
16
Reserved
R-0
15
8
Reserved
R-0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
VP2EN
VP1EN
VP0EN
I2C0EN
MCBSP1EN
MCBSP0EN
MCASP0EN
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write, -n = value after reset
Figure 3-1. Peripheral Configuration Register (PERCFG)
[Address Location: 0x01B3F000 - 0x01B3F003]
Table 3-4. Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:7
Reserved
6
VP2EN
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
VP2 Enable bit.
Determines whether the VP2 peripheral is enabled or disabled.
(This feature allows power savings by disabling the peripheral when not in use.)
0 = VP2 is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
1 = VP2 is enabled.
VP1 Enable bit.
Determines whether the VP1 peripheral is enabled or disabled.
5
56
VP1EN
0 = VP1 is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
(This feature allows power savings by disabling the peripheral when not in use.)
1 = VP1 is enabled.
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 3-4. Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register Selection Bit Descriptions (continued)
BIT
NAME
DESCRIPTION
VP0 Enable bit.
Determines whether the VP0 peripheral is enabled or disabled.
4
VP0EN
0 = VP0 is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
(This feature allows power savings by disabling the peripheral when not in use.)
1 = VP0 is enabled.
Inter-integrated circuit 0 (I2C0) enable bit.
Selects whether I2C0 peripheral is enabled or disabled (default).
3
I2C0EN
0 = I2C0 is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
1 = I2C0 is enabled.
Video Port 1 (VP1) lower data pins vs. McBSP1 enable bit.
Selects whether VP1 peripheral lower-data pins or the McBSP1 peripheral is enabled.
2
MCBSP1EN
0 = VP1 lower-data pins are enabled and function (if VP1EN=1), McBSP1 is disabled; the remaining VP1
upper-data pins are dependent on the MCASP0EN bit and the VP1EN bit settings.
1 = McBSP1 is enabled, VP1 lower-data pin functions are disabled (default).
For a graphic (logic) representation of this Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register selection bit and
the signal pins controlled/selected, see Figure 3-2.
Video Port 0 (VP0) lower data pins vs. McBSP0 enable bit.
Selects whether VP0 peripheral lower-data pins or the McBSP1 peripheral is enabled.
1
MCBSP0EN
0 = VP0 lower-data pins are enabled and function (if VP0EN=1), McBSP0 is disabled; the remaining VP0
upper-data pins are dependent on the MCASP0EN bit and the VP1EN bit settings.
1 = McBSP0 is enabled, VP0 lower-data pin functions are disabled (default).
For a graphic (logic) representation of this Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register selection bit and
the signal pins controlled/selected, see Figure 3-2.
McASP0 vs. VP0/VP1 upper-data pins select bit.
Selects whether the McASP0 peripheral or the VP0 and VP1 upper-data pins are enabled.
0
MCASP0EN
0 = McASP0 is disabled; VP0 and VP1 upper-data pins are enabled; and the VP0 and VP1lower-data
pins are dependent on the MCBSP0EN and VP0EN, and MCSBP1EN and VP1EN bits, respectively.
1 = McASP0 is enabled; VP0 and VP1 upper-data pins are disabled; and the VP0 and VP1lower-data
pins are dependent on the MCBSP0EN and VP0EN, and MCSBP1EN andVP1EN bits, respectively.
For a graphic (logic) representation of this Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register selection bit and
the signal pins controlled/selected, see Figure 3-2.
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
57
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
McBSP0EN [PERCFG.1]
VP0
Lower Data (10 pins)
VP0D[8:2] Muxed (A)
VP0D[9,1,0] Standalone
1
McBSP0
0
VP0 (Channel A)
McBSP1EN [PERCFG.2]
VP1
Lower Data (10 pins)
VP1D[8:2] Muxed (B)
VP1D[9,1,0] Standalone
1
McBSP1
0
VP1 (Channel A)
1
VP0 (Channel A)
McBSP0EN [PERCFG.1]
McASP0EN [PERCFG.0]
VP0
Upper Data (10 pins)
VP0D[19:12] Muxed (C)
VP0D[11:10] Standalone
McASP0EN [PERCFG.0]
0
1
McASP0 Control
0
VP0 (Channel B)
McBSP1EN [PERCFG.2]
McASP0EN [PERCFG.0]
1
VP1 (Channel A)
VP1
Upper Data (10 pins)
VP1D[19:12] Muxed (D)
VP1D[11:10] Standalone
A.
B.
C.
D.
McASP0EN [PERCFG.0]
0
1
McASP0 Data
0
VP1 (Channel B)
Consists of: VP0D[8]/CLKR0, VP0D[7]/FSR0, VP0D[6]/DR0, VP0D[5]/CLKS0, VP0D[4]/DX0, VP0D[3]/FSX0,
VP0D[2]/CLKX0.
Consists of: VP1D[8]/CLKR1, VP1D[7]/FSR1, VP1D[6]/DR1, VP1D[5]/CLKS1, VP1D[4]/DX1, VP1D[3]/FSX1,
VP1D[2]/CLKX1.
Consists of: VP0D[19]/AHCLKX0, VP0D[18]/AFSX0, VP0D[17]/ACLKX0, VP0D[16]/AMUTE0, VP0D[15]/AMUTEIN0,
VP0D[14]/AHCLKR0, VP0D[13]/AFSR0, VP0D[12]/ACLKR0
Consists of: VP1D[19:12]/AXR0[7:0]
Figure 3-2. VP1, VP0, McBSP1, McBSP0, and McASP0 Data/Control Pin Muxing
58
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
3.3
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Peripheral Configuration Lock
By default, the McASP0, VP0, VP1, VP2, and I2C peripherals are disabled on power up. In order to use
these peripherals on the DM642 device, the peripheral must first be enabled in the Peripheral
Configuration register (PERCFG). Software muxed pins should not be programmed to switch
functionalities during run-time. Care should also be taken to ensure that no accesses are being
performed before disabling the peripherals. To help minimize power consumption in the DM642
device, unused peripherals may be disabled.
Figure 3-3 shows the flow needed to enable (or disable) a given peripheral on the DM642 device.
Unlock the PERCFG Register
Using the PCFGLOCK Register
Write to
PERCFG Register
to Enable/Disable Peripherals
Read from
PERCFG Register
Wait 128 CPU Cycles Before
Accessing Enabled Peripherals
Figure 3-3. Peripheral Enable/Disable Flow Diagram
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
59
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
A 32-bit key (value = 0x10C0010C) must be written to the Peripheral Configuration Lock register
(PCFGLOCK) in order to unlock access to the PERCFG register. Reading the PCFGLOCK register
determines whether the PERCFG register is currently locked (LOCKSTAT bit = 1) or unlocked
(LOCKSTAT bit = 0), see Figure 3-4. A peripheral can only be enabled when the PERCFG register is
"unlocked" (LOCKSTAT bit = 0).
Read Accesses
31
1
0
Reserved
LOCKSTAT
R-0
R-1
Write Accesses
31
0
LOCK
W-0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write, -n = value after reset
Figure 3-4. PCFGLOCK Register Diagram [Address Location: 0x01B3 F018] - Read/Write Accesses
Table 3-5. PCFGLOCK Register Selection Bit Descriptions - Read Accesses
BIT
NAME
31:1
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Lock status bit.
Determines whether the PERCFG register is locked or unlocked.
0
LOCKSTAT
0 = Unlocked, read accesses to the PERCFG register allowed.
1 = Locked, write accesses to the PERCFG register do not modify the register state [default].
Reads are unaffected by Lock Status.
Table 3-6. PCFGLOCK Register Selection Bit Descriptions - Write Accesses
BIT
31:0
NAME
LOCK
DESCRIPTION
Lock bits.
0x10C0010C = Unlocks PERCFG register accesses.
Any write to the PERCFG register will automatically relock the register. In order to avoid the unnecessary
overhead of multiple unlock/enable sequences, all peripherals should be enabled with a single write to the
PERCFG register with the necessary enable bits set.
Prior to waiting 128 CPU cycles, the PERCFG register should be read. There is no direct correlation
between the CPU issuing a write to the PERCFG register and the write actually occurring. Reading the
PERCFG register after the write is issued forces the CPU to wait for the write to the PERCFG register to
occur.
Once a peripheral is enabled, the DSP (or other peripherals such as the HPI) must wait a minimum of 128
CPU cycles before accessing the enabled peripheral. The user must ensure that no accesses are
performed to a peripheral while it is disabled.
60
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
3.4
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Device Status Register Description
The device status register depicts the status of the device peripheral selection. For the actual register bit
names and their associated bit field descriptions, see Figure 3-5 and Table 3-7.
31
24
Reserved
R-0
23
16
Reserved
R-0
15
11
10
9
8
Reserved
12
MAC_EN
HPI_WIDTH
PCI_EEAI
PCI_EN
R-0
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
CLKMODE1
CLKMODE0
LENDIAN
BOOTMODE1
BOOTMODE0
AECLKINSEL1
AECLKINSEL0
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write, -n = value after reset
Figure 3-5. Device Status Register (DEVSTAT) Description - 0x01B3 F004
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
61
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-7. Device Status (DEVSTAT) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:12
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
EMAC enable bit.
Shows the status of whether EMAC peripheral is enabled or disabled (default).
11
MAC_EN
0 = EMAC is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
1 = EMAC is enabled.
This bit has no effect if the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).
HPI bus width control bit.
Shows the status of whether the HPI bus operates in 32-bit mode or in 16-bit mode (default).
10
HPI_WIDTH
0 = HPI operates in 16-bit mode. (default).
1 = HPI operates in 32-bit mode.
PCI EEPROM auto-initialization bit (PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM).
Shows the status of whether the PCI module initializes internal registers via external EEPROM or if the
internal PCI default values are used instead (default).
9
PCI_EEAI
0 = PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled; the PCI peripheral uses the specified PCI default
values (default).
1 = PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled; the PCI peripheral is configured through
EEPROM provided the PCI peripheral pin is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).
PCI enable bit.
Shows the status of whether the PCI peripheral is enabled or disabled (default).
8
PCI_EN
0 = PCI disabled. (default).
1 = PCI enabled.
Global select for the PCI vs. HPI/EMAC/MDIO/GPIO peripherals.
7
Reserved
6
CLKMODE1
5
CLKMODE0
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Clock mode select bits
Shows the status of whether the CPU clock frequency equals the input clock frequency X1 (Bypass), x6,
or x12.
Clock mode select for CPU clock frequency (CLKMODE[1:0])
00
01
10
11
- Bypass (x1) (default mode)
- x6
- x12
- Reserved
For more details on the CLKMODE pins and the PLL multiply factors, see the Clock PLL section of this
data sheet.
Device Endian mode (LEND)
Shows the status of whether the system is operating in Big Endian mode or Little Endian mode (default).
4
LENDIAN
0 - System is operating in Big Endian mode
1 - System is operating in Little Endian mode (default)
62
3
BOOTMODE1
Bootmode configuration bits
Shows the status of what device bootmode configuration is operational.
2
BOOTMODE0
1
AECLKINSEL1
EMIFA input clock select
Shows the status of what clock mode is enabled or disabled for the EMIF.
Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
0
AECLKINSEL0
00
01
10
11
Bootmode [1:0]
00 - No boot (default mode)
01 - HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)
10 - Reserved
11 - EMIFA boot
- AECLKIN (default mode)
- CPU/4 Clock Rate
- CPU/6 Clock Rate
- Reserved
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
3.5
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Multiplexed Pin Configurations
Multiplexed pins are pins that are shared by more than one peripheral and are internally multiplexed.
Some of these pins are configured by software, and the others are configured by external pullup/pulldown
resistors only at reset. Those muxed pins that are configured by software should not be programmed to
switch functionalities during run-time. Those muxed pins that are configured by external pullup/pulldown
resistors are mutually exclusive; only one peripheral has primary control of the function of these pins after
reset. Table 3-8 identifies the multiplexed pins on the DM642 device; shows the default (primary) function
and the default settings after reset; and describes the pins, registers, etc. necessary to configure specific
multiplexed functions.
Table 3-8. DM642 Device Multiplexed Pin Configurations(1)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
NAME
NO.
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
DEFAULT
SETTING
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]
D6
CLKOUT4
GP1EN = 0 (disabled)
CLKOUT6/GP0[2]
C6
CLKOUT6
GP2EN = 0 (disabled)
DESCRIPTION
These pins are software-configurable. To use these pins
as GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable
Register and the GPxDIR bits in the GPIO Direction
Register must be properly configured.
GPxEN = 1: GPx pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0: GPx pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1: GPx pin is an output
The VDAC output pin function is default.
VDAC/GP0[8]
AD1
VDAC
GP8EN = 0 (disabled)
MAC_EN = 0 (disabled)
To use GP0[8] as a GPIO pin, the PCI needs to be
disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the GPxEN bits in the GPIO
Enable Register and the GPxDIR bits in the GPIO
Direction Register must be properly configured.
GP8EN = 1: GP8 pin enabled
GP8DIR = 0: GP8 pin is an input
GP8DIR = 1: GP8 pin is an output
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0),
this pin must not be pulled up.
GP0[9]/PIDSEL
K3
GP0[10]/PCBE3
J2
GP0[11]/PREQ
F1
GP0[12]/PGNT
H4
GP0[13]/PINTA
G4
GP0[14]/PCLK
C1
GP0[15]/PRST
VP1D[19]/AXR0[7]
GPxEN = 0 (disabled)
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled) (1)
GPxEN = 1: GPx pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0: GPx pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1: GPx pin is an output
G3
AB12
VP1D[18]/AXR0[6]
AB11
VP1D[17]/AXR0[5]
AC11
VP1D[16]/AXR0[4]
AD11
VP1D[15]/AXR0[3]
AE11
VP1D[14]/AXR0[2]
AC10
VP1D[13]/AXR0[1]
AD10
VP1D[12]/AXR0[0]
AC9
VP1D[8]/CLKR1
AD8
VP1D[7]/FSR1
AC7
VP1D[6]/DR1
AD7
VP1D[5]/CLKS1
AE7
VP1D[4]/DX1
AC6
VP1D[3]/FSX1
AD6
VP1D[2]/CLKX1
AE6
(1)
None
To use GP0[15:9] as GPIO pins, the PCI needs to be
disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the GPxEN bits in the GPIO
Enable Register and the GPxDIR bits in the GPIO
Direction Register must be properly configured.
By default, no function is enabled upon reset.
None
McBSP1
functions
To enable the Video Port 1 data pins, the VP1EN bit in the
VP1EN bit = 0 (disabled) PERCFG register must be set to a 1. (McASP0 data pins
MCASP0EN bit = 0
are disabled).
(disabled)
To enable the McASP0[7:0] data pins, the MCASP0EN bit
in the PERCFG register must be set to a 1. (VP1 upper
data pins are disabled).
By default, the McBSP1 peripheral, function is enabled
VP1EN bit = 0 (disabled) upon reset (MCBSP1EN bit = 1).
MCBSP1EN bit = 1
To enable the Video Port 1 data pins, the VP1EN bit in the
(enabled)
PERCFG register must be set to a 1.
All other standalone PCI pins are tied-off internally (pins in Hi-Z) when the peripheral is disabled [PCI_EN = 0].
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
63
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-8. DM642 Device Multiplexed Pin Configurations(1) (continued)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
NAME
NO.
VP0D[19]/AHCLKX0
AC12
VP0D[18]/AFSX0
AD12
VP0D[17]/ACLKX0
AB13
VP0D[16]/AMUTE0
AC13
VP0D[15]/AMUTEIN0
AD13
VP0D[14]/AHCLKR0
AB14
VP0D[13]/AFSR0
AC14
VP0D[12]/ACLKR0
AD14
VP0D[8]/CLKR0
AE15
VP0D[7]/FSR0
AB16
VP0D[6]/DR0
AC16
VP0D[5]/CLKS0
AD16
VP0D[4]/DX0
AE16
VP0D[3]/FSX0
AF16
VP0D[2]/CLKX0
AF17
XSP_CLK/MDCLK
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
None
McBSP0
functions
R5
To enable the Video Port 0 data pins, the VP0EN bit in the
VP0EN bit = 0 (disabled) PERCFG register must be set to a 1. (McASP0 control
MCASP0EN bit = 0
pins are disabled).
(disabled)
To enable the McASP0 control pins, the MCASP0EN bit in
the PERCFG register must be set to a 1. (VP0 upper data
pins are disabled).
By default, the McBSP0 peripheral function is enabled
VP0EN bit = 0 (disabled) upon reset (MCBSP0EN bit = 1).
MCBSP0EN bit = 1
To enable the Video Port 0 data pins, the VP0EN bit in the
(enabled)
PERCFG register must be set to a 1.
By default, no functions enabled upon reset (PCI is
disabled).
None
P5
HAS/PPAR
P3
HAS
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
P1
HCNTL1
HCNTL0/PSTOP
R3
HCNTL0
HDS1/PSERR
R2
HDS1
HDS2/PCBE1
T2
HDS2
HR/W/PCBE2
M1
HR/W
HHWIL/PTRDY
N3
HHWIL
(HPI16 only)
HINT/PFRAME
N4
HINT
HCS/PPERR
R1
HCS
HRDY/PIRDY
N1
HRDY
64
DESCRIPTION
By default, no function is enabled upon reset.
XSP_DO/MDIO
(2)
DEFAULT
SETTING
To enable the PCI peripheral, an external pullup resistor
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled) (2) (1 kΩ) must be provided on the PCI_EN pin (setting
MAC_EN = 0
PCI_EN = 1 at reset)
(disabled) (2)
To enable the MDIO peripheral (which also enables the
EMAC peripheral), an external pullup resistor (1 kΩ) must
be provided on the MAC_EN pin (setting MAC_EN = 1 at
reset)
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset (PCI is disabled).
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled) (2) To enable the PCI peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the PCI_EN pin (setting
PCI_EN = 1 at reset).
All other standalone PCI pins are tied-off internally (pins in Hi-Z) when the peripheral is disabled [PCI_EN = 0].
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 3-8. DM642 Device Multiplexed Pin Configurations(1) (continued)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
NAME
NO.
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
DEFAULT
SETTING
DESCRIPTION
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset (PCI is disabled).
HD[23,15:0]/AD[23,15:0]
HD31/AD31/MRCLK
(2)
HD[23, 15:0]
G1
HD31
HD30/AD30/MCRS
H3
HD30
HD29/AD29/MRXER
G2
HD29
HD28/AD28/MRXDV
J4
HD28
HD27/AD27/MRXD3
H2
HD27
HD26/AD26/MRXD2
J3
HD26
HD25/AD25/MRXD1
J1
HD25
HD24/AD24/MRXD0
K4
HD24
HD22/AD22/MTCLK
L4
HD22
HD21/AD21/MCOL
K2
HD21
HD20/AD20/MTXEN
L3
HD20
HD19/AD19/MTXD3
L2
HD19
HD18/AD18/MTXD2
M4
HD18
HD17/AD17/MTXD1
M2
HD17
HD16/AD16/MTXD0
M3
HD16
3.6
(1)
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)
To enable the PCI peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the PCI_EN pin (setting
PCI_EN = 1 at reset).
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset (PCI is disabled).
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)(1)
MAC_EN = 0
(disabled)(1)
To enable the PCI peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the PCI_EN pin (setting
PCI_EN = 1 at reset).
To enable the EMAC peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the MAC_EN pin (setting
MAC_EN = 1 at reset).
Debugging Considerations
It is recommended that external connections be provided to device configuration pins, including
TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66, HD5/AD5, PCI_EN, and
TOUT0/MAC_EN. Although internal pullup/pulldown resistors exist on these pins, providing external
connectivity adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes.
Internal pullup/pulldown resistors also exist on the non-configuration pins on the AEA bus (AEA[18:0]). Do
not oppose the internal pullup/pulldown resistors on these non-configuration pins with external
pullup/pulldown resistors. If an external controller provides signals to these non-configuration pins, these
signals must be driven to the default state of the pins at reset, or not be driven at all.
For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the terminal functions table.
3.7
Configuration Examples
Figure 3-6 through Figure 3-8 illustrate examples of peripheral selections that are configurable on the
DM642 device.
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
65
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
64
AED[63:0]
PCI
HD[15:0]
EMIFA
16
HCNTL0, HCNTL1,
HHWIL, HAS, HR/W,
HCS, HDS1, HDS2
AEA[22:3], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0],
AECLKOUT1, AECLKOUT2,
ASDCKE, ASOE3, APDT,
AHOLDA, ABUSREQ,
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE,
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
Clock
and
System
HPI
(16-Bit)
HRDY, HINT
AECLKIN, AARDY, AHOLD
CLKIN,
CLKMODE0, CLKMODE1
MTXD[3:0], MTXEN
EMAC
TIMER2
MDIO
TIMER1
CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, PLLV
MRXD[3:0], MRXER,
MRXDV, MCOL, MCRS,
MTCLK, MRCLK
TINP1
MDIO, MDCLK
TOUT1/LENDIAN
STCLK (A)
VP0CLK0
VP0CLK1,
VP0CTL[2:0],
VP0D[19:0]
TINP0
VP0
(20-Bit)
TIMER0
McBSP0
GP0
and
EXT_INT
TOUT0/MACEN
GP0[15:9, 3:0]
GP0[7:4]
McASP0 Control
SCL0
I2C0
SDA0
McASP0 Data
McBSP1
VIC
VP1
(20-Bit)
VP2
(20-Bit)
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66
STCLK (A)
STCLK (A)
VP1CLK0
VP1CLK1,
VP1CTL[2:0],
VP1D[19:0]
PERCFG Register Value:
External Pins:
0x0000 0078
PCI_EN = 0
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI = 0
VP2CLK0
VP2CLK1,
VP2CTL[2:0],
VP2D[19:0]
HD5 = 0 TOUT0/MAC_EN = 1
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
A. STCLK supports all three video ports (VP2, VP1, and VP0).
Figure 3-6. Configuration Example A
(3 20-Bit Video Ports + HPI + EMAC + MDIO + I2C0 + EMIF + 3 Timers)
66
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
64
AED[63:0]
PCI
16
HD[15:0]
HPI
(16-Bit)
HRDY, HINT
HCNTL0, HCNTL1,
HHWIL, HAS, HR/W,
HCS, HDS1, HDS2
EMIFA
AECLKIN, AARDY, AHOLD
AEA[22:3], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0],
AECLKOUT1, AECLKOUT2,
ASDCKE, ASOE3, APDT,
AHOLDA, ABUSREQ,
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE,
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
Clock
and
System
CLKIN,
CLKMODE0, CLKMODE1
MTXD[3:0], MTXEN
EMAC
TIMER2
MDIO
TIMER1
CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, PLLV
MRXD[3:0], MRXER,
MRXDV, MCOL, MCRS,
MTCLK, MRCLK
TINP1
MDIO, MDCLK
TOUT1/LENDIAN
STCLK (A)
TINP0
VP0CLK0
VP0CLK1,
VP0CTL[2:0],
VP0D[19:10]
CLKR0, FSR0, DR0,
CLKS0, DX0, FSX0,
CLKX0
VP0
(10-Bit)
TIMER0
McBSP0
GP0
and
EXT_INT
TOUT0/MACEN
GP0[15:9, 3:0]
GP0[7:4]
McASP0 Control
SCL0
I2C0
SDA0
McASP0 Data
CLKR1, FSR1, DR1,
CLKS1, DX1, FSX1,
CLKX1
McBSP1
VIC
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66
STCLK (A)
STCLK (A)
VP1
(10-Bit)
VP1CLK0
VP2
(20-Bit)
VP2CLK0
VP2CLK1,
VP2CTL[2:0],
VP2D[19:0]
VP1CLK1,
VP1CTL[2:0],
VP1D[19:10]
PERCFG Register Value:
Extenal Pins:
0x0000 007E
PCI_EN = 0
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI = 0
HD5 = 0
TOUT0/MAC_EN = 1
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
A. STCLK supports all three video ports (VP2, VP1, and VP0).
Figure 3-7. Configuration Example B
(2 10-Bit Video Ports + 2 McBSPs + EMAC + MDIO + I2C0 + EMIF)
[Possible Video IP Phone Application]
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
67
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
64
AED[63:0]
PCI
HD[15:0]
HRDY, HINT
HCNTL0, HCNTL1,
HHWIL, HAS, HR/W,
HCS, HDS1, HDS2
EMIFA
16
Clock
and
System
HPI
(16-Bit)
AECLKIN, AARDY, AHOLD
AEA[22:3], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0],
AECLKOUT1, AECLKOUT2,
ASDCKE, ASOE3, APDT,
AHOLDA, ABUSREQ,
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE,
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
CLKIN,
CLKMODE0, CLKMODE1
MTXD[3:0], MTXEN
EMAC
TIMER2
MDIO
TIMER1
MRXD[3:0], MRXER,
MRXDV, MCOL, MCRS,
MTCLK, MRCLK
CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, PLLV
TINP1
MDIO, MDCLK
TOUT1/LENDIAN
STCLK (A)
VP0CLK0
VP0CLK1,
VP0CTL[2:0],
VP0D[9:0]
AHCLKX0, AFSX0,
ACLKX0, AMUTE0,
AMUTEIN0, AHCLKR0,
AFSR0, ACLKR0
TINP0
VP0
(10-Bit)
TIMER0
McBSP0
GP0
and
EXT_INT
TOUT0/MACEN
McASP0 Control
GP0[15:9, 3:0]
GP0[7:4]
SCL0
I2C0
AXR0[7:0]
SDA0
McASP0 Data
McBSP1
VIC
VP1
(10-Bit)
VP2
(20-Bit)
STCLK (A)
VP1CLK0
VP1CLK1,
VP1CTL[2:0],
VP1D[9:0]
PERCFG Register Value:
Extenal Pins:
VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66
STCLK (A)
0x0000 0079
PCI_EN = 0
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI = 0
HD5 = 0
VP2CLK0
VP2CLK1,
VP2CTL[2:0],
VP2D[19:0]
TOUT0/MAC_EN = 1
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
A. STCLK supports all three video ports (VP2, VP1, and VP0).
Figure 3-8. Configuration Example C
(1 20-Bit Video Port, 2 10-Bit Video Ports + 1 McASP0 + VIC + I2C0 + EMIF)
[Possible Set-Top Box Application]
68
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
4 Device Operating Conditions
4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) (1)
Supply voltage ranges:
CVDD
(2)
–0.3 V to 1.8 V
DVDD
(2)
–0.3 V to 4 V
(except PCI), VI
Input voltage ranges:
–0.3 V to 4 V
(PCI), VIP
–0.5 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
(except PCI), VO
Output voltage ranges:
–0.3 V to 4 V
(PCI), VOP
–0.5 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
(default)
Operating case temperature ranges, TC:
0°C to 90°C
(A version) [A-500, A-600]
–40°C to 105°C
Storage temperature range, Tstg:
–65°C to 150°C
Temperature Range
Package Temperature Cycling:
(1)
(2)
–40°C to 125°C
Number of Cycles
500
Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
4.2
Recommended Operating Conditions
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core (–500 device)
(1)
Supply voltage, Core (A-500, A-600, -600, -720 devices)
(1)
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.14
1.2
1.26
V
1.36
1.4
1.44
V
DVDD
Supply voltage, I/O
3.14
3.3
3.46
V
VSS
Supply ground
0
0
0
V
VIH
High-level input voltage (except PCI)
2
VIL
Low-level input voltage (except PCI)
VIP
Input voltage (PCI)
VIHP
VILP
VOS
TC
(1)
(2)
V
0.8
V
–0.5
DVDD + 0.5
V
High-level input voltage (PCI)
0.5DVDD
DVDD + 0.5
V
Low-level input voltage (PCI)
–0.5
0.3DVDD
V
(2)
(2)
V
0
90
°C
–40
105
°C
Maximum voltage during overshoot/undershoot
Operating case temperature
Default
A version (A-500 and A-600)
–1.0
4.3
Future variants of the C64x DSPs may operate at voltages ranging from 0.9 V to 1.4 V to provide a range of system power/performance
options. TI highly recommends that users design-in a supply that can handle multiple voltages within this range (i.e., 1.2 V, 1.25 V,
1.3 V, 1.35 V, 1.4 V with ± 3% tolerances) by implementing simple board changes such as reference resistor values or input pin
configuration modifications. Examples of such supplies include the PT4660, PT5500, PT5520, PT6440, and PT6930 series from Power
Trends, a subsidiary of Texas Instruments. Not incorporating a flexible supply may limit the system's ability to easily adapt to future
versions of C64x devices.
The absolute maximum ratings should not be exceeded for more than 30% of the cycle period.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
69
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
4.3
www.ti.com
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and
Operating Case Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
PARAMETER
VOH
TEST CONDITIONS
High-level output voltage (except PCI) DVDD = MIN, IOH = MAX
(1)
(2)
VOHP
High-level output voltage (PCI)
IOHP = –0.5 mA, DVDD = 3.3 V
VOL
Low-level output voltage (except PCI)
DVDD = MIN, IOL = MAX (2)
VOLP
Low-level output voltage (PCI)
IOLP = 1.5 mA, DVDD = 3.3 V
MIN
TYP
0.9DVDD
VI = VSS to DVDD opposing internal pullup
resistor (4)
Input current (except PCI)
VI = VSS to DVDD opposing internal
pulldown resistor (4)
IIP
Input leakage current (PCI)
IOH
High-level output current
IOL
Low-level output current
(5)
V
0.4
V
(3)
V
0.1DVDD
±10
uA
50
100
150
uA
–150
–100
–50
uA
0 < VIP < DVDD = 3.3 V
±10
uA
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx
–16
mA
Video Ports, Timer, TDO, GPIO
(Excluding GP0[15:9, 2, 1]), McBSP
–8
mA
PCI/HPI
(3)
mA
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx
16
mA
Video Ports, Timer, TDO, GPIO
(Excluding GP0[15:9, 2, 1]), McBSP
8
mA
3
mA
(3)
mA
–0.5
SCL0 and SDA0
PCI/HPI
IOZ
Off-state output current
ICDD
Core supply current (6)
UNIT
V
(3)
VI = VSS to DVDD no opposing internal
resistor
II
MAX
2.4
1.5
VO = DVDD or 0 V
±10
uA
CVDD = 1.4 V, CPU clock = 720 MHz
1090
mA
CVDD = 1.4 V, CPU clock = 600 MHz
890
mA
CVDD = 1.2 V, CPU clock = 500 MHz
620
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V, CPU clock = 720 MHz
210
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V, CPU clock = 600 MHz
210
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V, CPU clock = 500 MHz
165
IDDD
I/O supply current (6)
Ci
Input capacitance
10
pF
Co
Output capacitance
10
pF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
70
mA
For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
Single pin driving IOH/IOL = MAX.
These rated numbers are from the PCI specification version 2.3. The DC specification and AC specification are defined in Table 5-3 and
Table 5-4, respectively.
Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
PCI input leakage currents include Hi-Z output leakage for all bidirectional buffers with 3-state outputs.
Measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power) at 25°C case temperature and 133-MHz EMIF for –600 and –720 speeds
(100-MHz EMIF for –500 speed). This model represents a device performing high-DSP-activity operations 50% of the time, and the
remainder performing low-DSP-activity operations. The high/low-DSP-activity models are defined as follows:
• High-DSP-Activity Model:
• CPU: 8 instructions/cycle with 2 LDDW instructions [L1 Data Memory: 128 bits/cycle via LDDW instructions;
L1 Program Memory: 256 bits/cycle; L2/EMIF EDMA: 50% writes, 50% reads to/from SDRAM (50% bit-switching)]
• McBSP: 2 channels at E1 rate
• Timers: 2 timers at maximum rate
• Low-DSP-Activity Model:
• CPU: 2 instructions/cycle with 1 LDH instruction [L1 Data Memory: 16 bits/cycle; L1 Program Memory: 256 bits per 4 cycles;
L2/EMIF EDMA: None]
• McBSP: 2 channels at E1 rate
• Timers: 2 timers at maximum rate
The actual current draw is highly application-dependent. For more details on core and I/O activity, refer to the TMS320DMx Power
Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA962).
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5 DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
5.1
Parameter Information
5.1.1
Parameter Information Device-Specific Information
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
4.0 pF
A.
B.
1.85 pF
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
Device Pin
(see note)
The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its
transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to
produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to
add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the
device pin.
Figure 5-1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
5.1.1.1
Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to 1.5 V for both "0" and "1" logic levels.
Vref = 1.5 V
Figure 5-2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks,
VOLMAX and VOH MIN for output clocks, VILP MAX and VIHP MIN for PCI input clocks, and VOLP MAX and
VOHP MIN for PCI output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN or
VIHP MIN or VOHP MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX or
VILP MAX or VOLP MAX)
Figure 5-3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
5.1.1.2
Signal Transition Rates
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).
5.1.1.3
Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
71
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer
information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS
models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing
Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as
buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.
For inputs, timing is most impacted by the round-trip propagation delay from the DSP to the external
device and from the external device to the DSP. This round-trip delay tends to negatively impact the input
setup time margin, but also tends to improve the input hold time margins (see Table 5-1 and Figure 5-4).
Figure 5-4 represents a general transfer between the DSP and an external device. The figure also
represents board route delays and how they are perceived by the DSP and the external device.
Table 5-1. Board-Level Timing Example
(see Figure 5-4)
NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
Clock route delay
2
Minimum DSP hold time
3
Minimum DSP setup time
4
External device hold time requirement
5
External device setup time requirement
6
Control signal route delay
7
External device hold time
8
External device access time
9
DSP hold time requirement
10
DSP setup time requirement
11
Data route delay
ECLKOUTx
(Output from DSP)
1
ECLKOUTx
(Input to External Device)
Signals (A)
Control
(Output from DSP)
2
3
4
5
Control Signals
(Input to External Device)
6
7
Data Signals (B)
(Output from External Device)
8
10
Data Signals (B)
(Input to DSP)
A.
B.
9
11
Control signals include data for Writes.
Data signals are generated during Reads from an external device.
Figure 5-4. Board-Level Input/Output Timings
5.2
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic
manner.
72
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.3
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Power Supplies
For more information regarding TI's power management products and suggested devices to power TI
DSPs, visit www.ti.com/dsppower.
5.3.1
Power-Supply Sequencing
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply. However,
systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended periods of time
(>1 second) if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
5.3.2
Power-Supply Design Considerations
A dual-power supply with simultaneous sequencing can be used to eliminate the delay between core and
I/O power up. A Schottky diode can also be used to tie the core rail to the I/O rail (see Figure 5-5).
I/O Supply
DVDD
Schottky
Diode
C6000
DSP
Core Supply
CVDD
VSS
GND
Figure 5-5. Schottky Diode Diagram
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance
applications utilizing the C6000™ platform of DSPs, the PC board should include separate power planes
for core, I/O, and ground, all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
5.3.3
Power-Supply Decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as
possible close to the DSP. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total of 60 caps, 30 for
the core supply and 30 for the I/O supply. These caps need to be close to the DSP power pins, no more
than 1.25 cm maximum distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better
because of their lower parasitic inductance. Proper capacitance values are also important. Small bypass
caps (near 560 pF) should be closest to the power pins. Medium bypass caps (220 nF or as large as can
be obtained in a small package) should be next closest. TI recommends no less than 8 small and
8 medium caps per supply (32 total) be placed immediately next to the BGA vias, using the "interior" BGA
space and at least the corners of the "exterior".
Eight larger caps (4 for each supply) can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on
the order of 100 µF) should be furthest away (but still as close as possible). No less than 4 large caps per
supply (8 total) should be placed outside of the BGA.
Any cap selection needs to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. As with the selection of
any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production lifetime should be
considered.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
73
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.3.4
www.ti.com
Peripheral Power-Down Operation
The DM642 device can be powered down in three ways:
• Power-down due to pin configuration
• Power-down due to software configuration – relates to the default state of the peripheral configuration
bits in the PERCFG register.
• Power-down during run-time via software configuration
On the DM642 device, the HPI, PCI, and EMAC and MDIO peripherals are controlled (selected) at the pin
level during chip reset (e.g., PCI_EN, HD5, and MAC_EN pins).
The McASP0, McBSP0, McBSP1, VP0, VP1, VP2, and I2C0 peripheral functions are selected via the
peripheral configuration (PERCFG) register bits.
For more detailed information on the peripheral configuration pins and the PERCFG register bits, see the
Device Configurations section of this document.
5.3.5
Power-Down Modes Logic
Figure 5-6 shows the power-down mode logic on the DM642
CLKOUT4
CLKOUT6
Internal Clock Tree
Clock
Distribution
and Dividers
PD1
PD2
PowerDown
Logic
Clock
PLL
IFR
IER
Internal
Peripherals
PWRD CSR
CPU
PD3
TMS320DM642
A.
CLKIN
RESET
External input clocks, with the exception of CLKIN, are not gated by the power-down mode logic.
Figure 5-6. Power-Down Mode Logic
74
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.3.6
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Triggering, Wake-up, and Effects
The power-down modes and their wake-up methods are programmed by setting the PWRD field (bits
15–10) of the control status register (CSR). The PWRD field of the CSR is shown in Figure 5-7 and
described in Table 5-2. When writing to the CSR, all bits of the PWRD field should be set at the same
time. Logic 0 should be used when writing to the reserved bit (bit 15) of the PWRD field. The CSR is
discussed in detail in the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number
SPRU189).
31
16
(See NOTE)
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved
Enable or
Non-Enabled
Interrupt Wake
Enabled
Interrupt Wake
PD3
PD2
PD1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
7
9
8
(See NOTE)
0
(See NOTE)
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writable, -n = value after reset
NOTE: The shaded bits are not part of the power-down logic discussion and therefore are not covered here. For information on these other
bit fields in the CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
Figure 5-7. PWRD Field of the CSR Register
A delay of up to nine clock cycles may occur after the instruction that sets the PWRD bits in the CSR
before the PD mode takes effect. As best practice, NOPs should be padded after the PWRD bits are set in
the CSR to account for this delay.
If PD1 mode is terminated by a non-enabled interrupt, the program execution returns to the instruction
where PD1 took effect. If PD1 mode is terminated by an enabled interrupt, the interrupt service routine will
be executed first, then the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect. In the case
with an enabled interrupt, the GIE bit in the CSR and the NMIE bit in the interrupt enable register (IER)
must also be set in order for the interrupt service routine to execute; otherwise, execution returns to the
instruction where PD1 took effect upon PD1 mode termination by an enabled interrupt.
PD2 and PD3 modes can only be aborted by device reset. Table 5-2 summarizes all the power-down
modes.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
75
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-2. Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes
PRWD Field
(BITS 15–10)
POWER-DOWN
MODE
000000
No power-down
001001
PD1
Wake by an enabled interrupt
010001
PD1
Wake by an enabled or
non-enabled interrupt
011010
(1)
PD2
(1)
011100
PD3 (1)
All others
Reserved
WAKE-UP METHOD
—
EFFECT ON CHIP'S OPERATION
—
CPU halted (except for the interrupt logic)
Power-down mode blocks the internal clock inputs at the
boundary of the CPU, preventing most of the CPU's logic from
switching. During PD1, EDMA transactions can proceed
between peripherals and internal memory.
Wake by a device reset
Output clock from PLL is halted, stopping the internal clock
structure from switching and resulting in the entire chip being
halted. All register and internal RAM contents are preserved. All
functional I/O "freeze" in the last state when the PLL clock is
turned off.
Wake by a device reset
Input clock to the PLL stops generating clocks. All register and
internal RAM contents are preserved. All functional I/O "freeze"
in the last state when the PLL clock is turned off. Following
reset, the PLL needs time to re-lock, just as it does following
power-up.
Wake-up from PD3 takes longer than wake-up from PD2
because the PLL needs to be re-locked, just as it does following
power-up.
—
—
When entering PD2 and PD3, all functional I/O remains in the previous state. However, for peripherals which are asynchronous in
nature or peripherals with an external clock source, output signals may transition in response to stimulus on the inputs. Under these
conditions, peripherals will not operate according to specifications.
5.3.7
C64x Power-Down Mode with an Emulator
If user power-down modes are programmed, and an emulator is attached, the modes will be masked to
allow the emulator access to the system. This condition prevails until the emulator is reset or the cable is
removed from the header. If power measurements are to be performed when in a power-down mode, the
emulator cable should be removed.
When the DSP is in power-down mode PD2 or PD3, emulation logic will force any emulation execution
command (such as Step or Run) to spin in IDLE. For this reason, PC writes (such as loading code) will
fail. A DSP reset will be required to get the DSP out of PD2/PD3.
76
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.4
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller
The EDMA controller handles all data transfers between the level-two (L2) cache/memory controller and
the device peripherals on the DM642 DSP. These data transfers include cache servicing, non-cacheable
memory accesses, user-programmed data transfers, and host accesses.
5.4.1
EDMA Device-Specific Information
5.4.1.1
EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
The C64x EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and external
memory. Table 5-3 lists the source of C64x EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the
programmable EDMA channels. For the DM642 device, the association of an event to a channel is fixed;
each of the EDMA channels has one specific event associated with it. These specific events are captured
in the EDMA event registers (ERL, ERH) even if the events are disabled by the EDMA event enable
registers (EERL, EERH). The priority of each event can be specified independently in the transfer
parameters stored in the EDMA parameter RAM. For more detailed information on the EDMA module and
how EDMA events are enabled, captured, processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the
TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU234).
Table 5-3. TMS320DM642 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events (1)
(1)
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
0
DSP_INT
1
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
2
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
3
SD_INTA
4
GPINT4/EXT_INT4
GP0 event 4/External interrupt pin 4
5
GPINT5/EXT_INT5
GP0 event 5/External interrupt pin 5
6
GPINT6/EXT_INT6
GP0 event 6/External interrupt pin 6
7
GPINT7/EXT_INT7
GP0 event 7/External interrupt pin 7
8
GPINT0
GP0 event 0
EVENT DESCRIPTION
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt
EMIFA SDRAM timer interrupt
9
GPINT1
GP0 event 1
10
GPINT2
GP0 event 2
11
GPINT3
GP0 event 3
12
XEVT0
McBSP0 transmit event
13
REVT0
McBSP0 receive event
14
XEVT1
McBSP1 transmit event
15
REVT1
McBSP1 receive event
16
VP0EVTYA
VP0 Channel A Y event DMA request
17
VP0EVTUA
VP0 Channel A Cb event DMA request
18
VP0EVTVA
VP0 Channel A Cr event DMA request
19
TINT2
20–23
–
Timer 2 interrupt
24
VP0EVTYB
VP0 Channel B Y event DMA request
25
VP0EVTUB
VP0 Channel B Cb event DMA request
26
VP0EVTVB
VP0 Channel B Cr event DMA request
27–31
–
32
AXEVTE0
None
None
McASP0 transmit even event
In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or alternate
transfer completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced
Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
77
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-3. TMS320DM642 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events (continued)
78
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
33
AXEVTO0
34
AXEVT0
35
AREVTE0
McASP0 receive even event
36
AREVTO0
McASP0 receive odd event
37
AREVT0
38
VP1EVTYB
VP1 Channel B Y event DMA request
39
VP1EVTUB
VP1 Channel B Cb event DMA request
40
VP1EVTVB
VP1 Channel B Cr event DMA request
41
VP2EVTYB
VP2 Channel B Y event DMA request
42
VP2EVTUB
VP2 Channel B Cb event DMA request
43
VP2EVTVB
VP2 Channel B Cr event DMA request
44
ICREVT0
I2C0 receive event
45
ICXEVT0
I2C0 transmit event
EVENT DESCRIPTION
McASP0 transmit odd event
McASP0 transmit event
McASP0 receive event
46–47
–
48
GPINT8
None
GP0 event 8
49
GPINT9
GP0 event 9
50
GPINT10
GP0 event 10
51
GPINT11
GP0 event 11
52
GPINT12
GP0 event 12
53
GPINT13
GP0 event 13
54
GPINT14
GP0 event 14
55
GPINT15
GP0 event 15
56
VP1EVTYA
VP1 Channel A Y event DMA request
57
VP1EVTUA
VP1 Channel A Cb event DMA request
58
VP1EVTVA
VP1 Channel A Cr event DMA request
59
VP2EVTYA
VP2 Channel A Y event DMA request
60
VP2EVTUA
VP2 Channel A Cb event DMA request
61
VP2EVTVA
VP2 Channel A Cr event DMA request
62–63
–
None
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.4.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
EDMA Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-4. EDMA Registers (C64x)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01A0 0800 – 01A0 FF98
–
01A0 FF9C
EPRH
Reserved
Event polarity high register
01A0 FFA4
CIPRH
Channel interrupt pending high register
01A0 FFA8
CIERH
Channel interrupt enable high register
01A0 FFAC
CCERH
Channel chain enable high register
01A0 FFB0
ERH
01A0 FFB4
EERH
Event enable high register
Event high register
01A0 FFB8
ECRH
Event clear high register
01A0 FFBC
ESRH
Event set high register
01A0 FFC0
PQAR0
Priority queue allocation register 0
01A0 FFC4
PQAR1
Priority queue allocation register 1
01A0 FFC8
PQAR2
Priority queue allocation register 2
01A0 FFCC
PQAR3
Priority queue allocation register 3
01A0 FFDC
EPRL
Event polarity low register
01A0 FFE0
PQSR
Priority queue status register
01A0 FFE4
CIPRL
Channel interrupt pending low register
01A0 FFE8
CIERL
Channel interrupt enable low register
01A0 FFEC
CCERL
Channel chain enable low register
01A0 FFF0
ERL
01A0 FFF4
EERL
Event enable low register
Event low register
01A0 FFF8
ECRL
Event clear low register
01A0 FFFC
ESRL
Event set low register
01A1 0000 – 01A3 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 5-5. Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0200 0000
QOPT
QDMA options parameter register
0200 0004
QSRC
QDMA source address register
0200 0008
QCNT
QDMA frame count register
0200 000C
QDST
QDMA destination address register
0200 0010
QIDX
QDMA index register
0200 0014 – 0200 001C
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
0200 0020
QSOPT
QDMA pseudo options register
0200 0024
QSSRC
QDMA psuedo source address register
0200 0028
QSCNT
QDMA psuedo frame count register
0200 002C
QSDST
QDMA destination address register
0200 0030
QSIDX
QDMA psuedo index register
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
79
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-6. EDMA Parameter RAM (C64x) (1)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01A0 0000 – 01A0 0017
–
Parameters for Event 0 (6 words)
01A0 0018 – 01A0 002F
–
Parameters for Event 1 (6 words)
01A0 0030 – 01A0 0047
–
Parameters for Event 2 (6 words)
01A0 0048 – 01A0 005F
–
Parameters for Event 3 (6 words)
01A0 0060 – 01A0 0077
–
Parameters for Event 4 (6 words)
01A0 0078 – 01A0 008F
–
Parameters for Event 5 (6 words)
01A0 0090 – 01A0 00A7
–
Parameters for Event 6 (6 words)
01A0 00A8 – 01A0 00BF
–
Parameters for Event 7 (6 words)
01A0 00C0 – 01A0 00D7
–
Parameters for Event 8 (6 words)
01A0 00D8 – 01A0 00EF
–
Parameters for Event 9 (6 words)
01A0 00F0 – 01A0 00107
–
Parameters for Event 10 (6 words)
01A0 0108 – 01A0 011F
–
Parameters for Event 11 (6 words)
01A0 0120 – 01A0 0137
–
Parameters for Event 12 (6 words)
01A0 0138 – 01A0 014F
–
Parameters for Event 13 (6 words)
01A0 0150 – 01A0 0167
–
Parameters for Event 14 (6 words)
01A0 0168 – 01A0 017F
–
Parameters for Event 15 (6 words)
01A0 0180 – 01A0 0197
–
Parameters for Event 16 (6 words)
01A0 0198 – 01A0 01AF
–
Parameters for Event 17 (6 words)
...
...
01A0 05D0 – 01A0 05E7
–
Parameters for Event 62 (6 words)
01A0 05E8 – 01A0 05FF
–
Parameters for Event 63 (6 words)
01A0 0600 – 01A0 0617
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 0 (6 words)
01A0 0618 – 01A0 062F
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 1 (6 words)
...
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 20 (6 words)
01A0 07F8 – 01A0 080F
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 21 (6 words)
01A0 0810 – 01A0 0827
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 22 (6 words)
...
...
01A0 13C8 – 01A0 13DF
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 147 (6 words)
01A0 13E0 – 01A0 13F7
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 148 (6 words)
01A0 13F8 – 01A0 13FF
–
Scratch pad area (2 words)
01A0 1400 – 01A3 FFFF
–
Reserved
80
Reload/Link Parameters for
other Event 0–15
...
01A0 07E0 – 01A0 07F7
(1)
COMMENTS
Parameters for Event 0
(6 words) or Reload/Link
Parameters for other Event
The DM642 device has 213 EDMA parameters total: 64-Event/Reload channels and 149-Reload only parameter sets [six (6) words
each] that can be used to reload/link EDMA transfers.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.5
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Interrupts
5.5.1
Interrupt Sources and Interrupt Selector
The C64x DSP core supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 5-7. The highest-priority
interrupt is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest-priority interrupt is INT_15. The first four
interrupts (INT_00–INT_03) are non-maskable and fixed. The remaining interrupts (INT_04–INT_15) are
maskable and default to the interrupt source specified in Table 5-7. The interrupt source for interrupts
4–15 can be programmed by modifying the selector value (binary value) in the corresponding fields of the
Interrupt Selector Control registers: MUXH (address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004).
Table 5-7. DM642 DSP Interrupts
CPU
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INT_00 (1)
–
–
RESET
INT_01 (1)
–
–
NMI
INT_02 (1)
–
–
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
INT_03 (1)
–
–
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
(2)
MUXL[4:0]
00100
GPINT4/EXT_INT4
GP0 interrupt 4/External interrupt pin 4
INT_05 (2)
MUXL[9:5]
00101
GPINT5/EXT_INT5
GP0 interrupt 5/External interrupt pin 5
INT_06 (2)
MUXL[14:10]
00110
GPINT6/EXT_INT6
GP0 interrupt 6/External interrupt pin 6
(2)
MUXL[20:16]
00111
GPINT7/EXT_INT7
GP0 interrupt 7/External interrupt pin 7
INT_08 (2)
MUXL[25:21]
01000
EDMA_INT
EDMA channel (0 through 63) interrupt
INT_09 (2)
MUXL[30:26]
01001
EMU_DTDMA
(2)
MUXH[4:0]
00011
SD_INTA
INT_11 (2)
MUXH[9:5]
01010
EMU_RTDXRX
EMU real-time data exchange (RTDX) receive
INT_12 (2)
MUXH[14:10]
01011
EMU_RTDXTX
EMU RTDX transmit
INT_13 (2)
MUXH[20:16]
00000
DSP_INT
(2)
MUXH[25:21]
00001
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
INT_15 (2)
MUXH[30:26]
00010
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
–
–
01100
XINT0
McBSP0 transmit interrupt
–
–
01101
RINT0
McBSP0 receive interrupt
–
–
01110
XINT1
McBSP1 transmit interrupt
–
–
01111
RINT1
McBSP1 receive interrupt
–
–
10000
GPINT0
–
–
10001
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10010
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10011
TINT2
–
–
10100
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10101
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10110
ICINT0
–
–
10111
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
11000
EMAC_MDIO_INT
EMAC/MDIO interrupt
–
–
11001
VPINT0
VP0 interrupt
–
–
11010
VPINT1
VP1 interrupt
–
–
11011
VPINT2
VP2 interrupt
–
–
11100
AXINT0
McASP0 transmit interrupt
INT_04
INT_07
INT_10
INT_14
(1)
(2)
INTERRUPT SOURCE
EMU DTDMA
EMIFA SDRAM timer interrupt
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt
GP0 interrupt 0
Timer 2 interrupt
I2C0 interrupt
Interrupts INT_00 through INT_03 are non-maskable and fixed.Interrupts
INT_04 through INT_15 are programmable by modifying the binary selector values in the Interrupt Selector Control registers fields.
Table 5-7 shows the default interrupt sources for Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15. For more detailed information on interrupt sources
and selection, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Interrupt Selector Reference Guide (literature number SPRU646).
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
81
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-7. DM642 DSP Interrupts (continued)
CPU
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
INTERRUPT
EVENT
–
–
11101
ARINT0
–
–
11110 – 11111
Reserved
5.5.2
INTERRUPT SOURCE
McASP0 receive interrupt
Reserved. Do not use.
Interrupts Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-8. Interrupt Selector Registers (C64x)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
019C 0000
MUXH
Interrupt multiplexer high
Selects which interrupts drive CPU
interrupts 10–15 (INT10–INT15)
019C 0004
MUXL
Interrupt multiplexer low
Selects which interrupts drive CPU
interrupts 4–9 (INT04–INT09)
019C 0008
EXTPOL
External interrupt polarity
Sets the polarity of the external
interrupts (EXT_INT4–EXT_INT7)
019C 000C – 019F FFFF
–
5.5.3
Reserved
External Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-9. Timing Requirements for External Interrupts (1) (see Figure 5-8)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
(1)
1
tw(ILOW)
2
tw(IHIGH)
UNIT
MAX
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse low
4P
ns
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse low
8P
ns
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse high
4P
ns
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse high
8P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
1
2
EXT_INTx, NMI
Figure 5-8. External/NMI Interrupt Timing
82
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.6
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Reset
A hardware reset (RESET) is required to place the DSP into a known good state out of power-up. The
RESET signal can be asserted (pulled low) prior to ramping the core and I/O voltages or after the core
and I/O voltages have reached their proper operating conditions. As a best practice, reset should be held
low during power-up. Prior to deasserting RESET (low-to-high transition), the core and I/O voltages should
be at their proper operating conditions and CLKIN should also be running at the correct frequency. When
PCI is enabled, the PCI input clock (PCLK) must be running prior to deasserting RESET as well.
When the PCI peripheral is enabled, a WARMRESET can be performed via the host. A WARMRESET
performs the same functionality as a hardware reset, but does not relatch the boot configuration pins.
Whatever boot configuration that was latched on the previous hardware reset will be performed during the
WARMRESET.
A hardware reset does not reset the PCI peripheral state machine. The PCI state machine is reset via the
PRST signal. The PRST signal does not affect the DSP.
Emulation resets, done using Code Composer Studio™ IDE, have the same affect as a PCI
WARMRESET.
For information on peripheral selection at the rising edge of RESET, see the Device Configuration section
of this data manual.
5.6.1
Reset Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-10. Timing Requirements for Reset (see Figure 5-9)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1
tw(RST)
Width of the RESET pulse
16
tsu(boot)
Setup time, boot configuration bits valid before RESET high
17
th(boot)
Hold time, boot configuration bits valid after RESET high
18
tsu(PCLK-RSTH)
Setup time, PCLK active before RESET high (4)
(1)
(1)
UNIT
MAX
250
µs
4E or 4C (2)
ns
(3)
ns
32N
ns
4P
AEA[22:19], LENDIAN, PCIEEAI, and HD5/AD5 are the boot configuration pins during device reset.
E = 1/AECLKIN clock frequency in ns. C = 1/CLKIN clock frequency in ns.
Select the MIN parameter value, whichever value is larger.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
N = the PCI input clock (PCLK) period in ns. When PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this parameter must be met.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
83
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-11. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset (1)
(see Figure 5-9)
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
84
PARAMETER
–500
–600
–720
(2) (3)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
2
td(RSTL-ECKI)
Delay time, RESET low to AECLKIN synchronized internally
2E
3P + 20E
ns
3
td(RSTH-ECKI)
Delay time, RESET high to AECLKIN synchronized internally
2E
8P + 20E
ns
4
td(RSTL-ECKO1HZ)
Delay time, RESET low to AECLKOUT1 high impedance
2E
5
td(RSTH-ECKO1V)
Delay time, RESET high to AECLKOUT1 valid
6
td(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z high impedance
7
td(RSTH-EMIFZV)
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF Z valid
8
td(RSTL-EMIFHIV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF high group invalid
9
td(RSTH-EMIFHV)
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF high group valid
10
td(RSTL-EMIFLIV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group invalid
11
td(RSTH-EMIFLV)
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF low group valid
12
td(RSTL-LOWIV)
Delay time, RESET low to low group invalid
13
td(RSTH-LOWV)
Delay time, RESET high to low group valid
14
td(RSTL-ZHZ)
Delay time, RESET low to Z group high impedance
15
td(RSTH-ZV)
Delay time, RESET high to Z group valid
ns
8P + 20E
ns
2E
3P + 4E
ns
16E
8P + 20E
ns
2E
ns
8P + 20E
2E
ns
8P + 20E
0
ns
ns
11P
0
2P
ns
ns
ns
8P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
E = the EMIF input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
EMIF Z group consists of: AEA[22:3], AED[63:0], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE,
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, ASOE3, ASDCKE, and APDT
EMIF high group consists of: AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)
EMIF low group consists of: ABUSREQ; AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)
Low group consists of: XSP_CS, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, and XSP_DO/MDIO all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM is enabled (with
PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN = 0). Otherwise, the XSP_CLK/MDCLK and XSP_DO/MDIO pins are in the Z group. For more details on
the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Z group consists of: HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] and the muxed EMAC output pins, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, XSP_DO/MDIO, VP0D[2]/CLKX0,
VP1D[2]/CLKX1, VP0D[3]/FSX0, VP1D[3]/FSX1, VP0D[4]/DX0, VP1D[4]/DX1, VP0D[8]/CLKR0, VP1D[8]/CLKR1, VP0D[7]/FSR0,
VP1D[7]/FSR1, TOUT0, TOUT1, VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66, GP0[7:0], GP0[10]/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0,
GP0[13]/PINTA, GP0[11]/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR, HCNTL0/PSTOP, HHWIL/PTRDY
(16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, HINT/PFRAME, VP0D[19:9, 6,5,1,0], VP1D[19:9, 6,5,1,0], and VP2D[19:0].
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
CLKOUT4
CLKOUT6
1
RESET
18
PCLK
2
3
4
5
6
7
AECLKIN
AECLKOUT1
AECLKOUT2
EMIF Z Group (A)(B)
8
9
10
11
EMIF High Group (A)
EMIF Low Group (A)
12
13
14
15
Low Group (A)
Z Group (A)(B)
16
Boot and Device
Configuration Inputs (C)
A.
B.
C.
17
EMIF Z group consists of: AEA[22:3], AED[63:0], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, ASOE3, ASDCKE, and APDT
EMIF high group consists of: AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)
EMIF low group consists of: ABUSREQ; AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)
Low group consists of: XSP_CS, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, and XSP_DO/MDIO all of which apply only when PCI
EEPROM is enabled (with PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN = 0). Otherwise, the XSP_CLK/MDCLK and
XSP_DO/MDIO pins are in the Z group. For more details on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet.
Z group consists of: HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] and the muxed EMAC output pins, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, XSP_DO/MDIO,
VP0D[2]/CLKX0, VP1D[2]/CLKX1, VP0D[3]/FSX0, VP1D[3]/FSX1, VP0D[4]/DX0, VP1D[4]/DX1, VP0D[8]/CLKR0,
VP1D[8]/CLKR1, VP0D[7]/FSR0, VP1D[7]/FSR1, TOUT0, TOUT1, VDAC/GP0[8]/PCI66, GP0[7:0], GP0[10]/PCBE3,
HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0, GP0[13]/PINTA, GP0[11]/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR,
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR, HCNTL0/PSTOP, HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY,
HINT/PFRAME, VP0D[19:9, 6,5,1,0], VP1D[19:9, 6,5,1,0], and VP2D[19:0].
If AEA[22:19], LENDIAN, PCIEEAI, and HD5/AD5 pins are actively driven, care must be taken to ensure no timing
contention between parameters 6, 7, 14, 15, 16, and 17.
Boot and Device Configurations Inputs (during reset) include: AEA[22:19], LENDIAN, PCIEEAI, and HD5/AD5.
The PCI_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user must not switch values throughout device operation.
Figure 5-9. Reset Timing
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
85
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.7
www.ti.com
Clock PLL
The PLL controller features hardware-configurable PLL multiplier controller, dividers (/2, /4, /6, and /8),
and reset controller. The PLL controller accepts an input clock, as determined by the logic state on the
CLKMODE[1:0] pins, from the CLKIN pin. The resulting clock outputs are passed to the DSP core,
peripherals, and other modules inside the C6000™ DSP.
5.7.1
Clock PLL Device-Specific Information
Most of the internal C64x™ DSP clocks are generated from a single source through the CLKIN pin. This
source clock either drives the PLL, which multiplies the source clock frequency to generate the internal
CPU clock, or bypasses the PLL to become the internal CPU clock.
To use the PLL to generate the CPU clock, the external PLL filter circuit must be properly designed.
Figure 5-10 shows the external PLL circuitry for either x1 (PLL bypass) or other PLL multiply modes.
To minimize the clock jitter, a single clean power supply should power both the C64x™ DSP device and
the external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For
the input clock timing requirements, see the input and output clocks electricals section.
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock
source must meet the DSP requirements in this data sheet (see the electrical characteristics over
recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case temperature table and the input and output
clocks electricals section).
86
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
3.3 V
CPU Clock
EMI
filter
C1
C2
10 µF
0.1 µF
/2
Peripheral Bus, EDMA
Clock
/8
Timer Internal Clock
PLLV
CLKMODE0
CLKMODE1
PLLMULT
/4
CLKOUT4, Peripheral Clock
(AUXCLK for McASP),
McBSP Internal Clock
/6
CLKOUT6
PLL
x6, x12
PLLCLK
CLKIN
1
00 01 10
0
/4
/2
ECLKIN
AEA[20:19]
Internal to DM642
A.
B.
C.
D.
EMIF
00 01 10
EK2RATE
(GBLCTL.[19,18])
ECLKOUT1 ECLKOUT2
(For the PLL Options, CLKMODE Pins Setup, and PLL Clock Frequency Ranges, see the "TMS320DMA642
PLL Multiply Factor Options, Clock Frequency Ranges, and Typical Lock Time" table.)
Place all PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter as close to the C6000 DSP device as possible. For the
best performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without
jumpers, switches, or components other than the ones shown.
For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (C1, C2,
and the EMI Filter).
The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DVDD.
EMI filter manufacturer TDK part number ACF451832-333, -233, -153, -103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.
Figure 5-10. External PLL Circuitry for Either PLL Multiply Modes or x1 (Bypass) Mode
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
87
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-12. TMS320DM642 PLL Multiply Factor Options, Clock Frequency Ranges,
and Typical Lock Time (1) (2)
GDK and ZDK PACKAGES – 23 x 23 mm BGA,
GNZ and ZNZ PACKAGES – 27 x 27 mm BGA
CLKMODE1
CLKMODE0
CLKMODE
(PLL MULTIPLY
FACTORS)
CLKIN
RANGE
(MHz)
CPU CLOCK
FREQUENCY
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT4
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT6
RANGE (MHz)
TYPICAL
LOCK TIME
(µs) (3)
0
0
Bypass (x1)
30–75
30–75
7.5–18.8
5–12.5
N/A
0
1
x6
30–75
180–450
45–112.5
30–75
1
0
x12
30–50
360–600
90–150
60–100
1
1
Reserved
–
–
–
–
(1)
75
–
These clock frequency range values are applicable to a DM642-600 speed device. For –500 and -720 device speed values, see the
CLKIN timing requirements table for the specific device speed.
Use external pullup resistors on the CLKMODE pins (CLKMODE1 and CLKMODE0) to set the DM642 device to one of the valid PLL
multiply clock modes (x6 or x12). With internal pulldown resistors on the CLKMODE pins (CLKMODE1, CLKMODE0), the default clock
mode is x1 (bypass).
Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL lock time may vary by as much as 150% from the specified typical value. For
example, if the typical lock time is specified as 100 µs, the maximum value may be as long as 250 µs.
(2)
(3)
5.7.2
Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks)
Table 5-13. Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –500 Devices (1)
(2) (3)
(see Figure 5-11)
–500
NO.
PLL MODE x12
PLL MODE x6
x1 (Bypass)
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
24
33.3
13.3
33.3
13.3
33.3
1
tc(CLKIN)
Cycle time, CLKIN
2
tw(CLKINH)
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.45C
0.45C
0.45C
3
tw(CLKINL)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.45C
0.45C
0.45C
4
tt(CLKIN)
Transition time, CLKIN
tJ(CLKIN)
Period jitter, CLKIN
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
UNIT
MIN
ns
ns
ns
5
5
1
ns
0.02C
0.02C
0.02C
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
Table 5-14. Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –600 Devices (1)
(2) (3)
(see Figure 5-11)
–600
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
88
PLL MODE x12
PLL MODE x6
x1 (Bypass)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
20
33.3
13.3
33.3
13.3
33.3
1
tc(CLKIN)
Cycle time, CLKIN
2
tw(CLKINH)
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.45C
3
tw(CLKINL)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.45C
4
tt(CLKIN)
Transition time, CLKIN
5
tJ(CLKIN)
Period jitter, CLKIN
0.45C
0.45C
0.45C
ns
ns
0.45C
ns
5
5
1
ns
0.02C
0.02C
0.02C
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-15. Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –720 Devices (1)
(2) (3)
(see Figure 5-11)
–720
NO.
PLL MODE x12
PLL MODE x6
x1 (Bypass)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
16.6
33.3
13.3
33.3
13.3
33.3
1
tc(CLKIN)
Cycle time, CLKIN
2
tw(CLKINH)
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.45C
0.45C
0.45C
ns
ns
3
tw(CLKINL)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.45C
0.45C
0.45C
ns
4
tt(CLKIN)
Transition time, CLKIN
5
tJ(CLKIN)
Period jitter, CLKIN
5
5
1
ns
0.02C
0.02C
0.02C
ns
Table 5-16. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT4 (1)
(see Figure 5-12)
(2) (3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
1
5
4
2
CLKIN
3
4
Figure 5-11. CLKIN Timing
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
UNIT
CLKMODE = x1, x6, x12
MIN
MAX
1
tw(CKO4H)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 high
2P – 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
2
tw(CKO4L)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 low
2P – 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
tt(CKO4)
Transition time, CLKOUT4
1
ns
3
(1)
(2)
(3)
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
3
1
CLKOUT4
2
3
Figure 5-12. CLKOUT4 Timing
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
89
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-17. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT6 (1)
(see Figure 5-13)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
(2) (3)
UNIT
CLKMODE = x1, x6, x12
MIN
MAX
1
tw(CKO6H)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 high
3P – 0.7
3P + 0.7
ns
2
tw(CKO6L)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 low
3P – 0.7
3P + 0.7
ns
3
tt(CKO6)
Transition time, CLKOUT6
1
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
3
1
CLKOUT6
2
3
Figure 5-13. CLKOUT6 Timing
Table 5-18. Timing Requirements for AECLKIN for EMIFA (1)
(2) (3)
(see Figure 5-14)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
MAX
(4)
16P
1
tc(EKI)
Cycle time, AECLKIN
6
2
tw(EKIH)
Pulse duration, AECLKIN high
2.7
3
tw(EKIL)
Pulse duration, AECLKIN low
2.7
4
tt(EKI)
Transition time, AECLKIN
tJ(EKI)
Period jitter, AECLKIN
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
3
ns
0.02E
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
E = the EMIF input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
Minimum AECLKIN cycle times must be met, even when AECLKIN is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum AECLKIN times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum useable speed of the EMIF may be lower due to AC timing requirements. On the 600
and 720 devices, 133-MHz operation is achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met. On the 500 devices,
100-MHz operation is achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met.
1
5
4
2
AECLKIN
3
4
Figure 5-14. AECLKIN Timing for EMIFA
90
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-19. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for AECLKOUT1 for the
EMIFA Module (1) (2) (3) (see Figure 5-15)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
tw(EKO1H)
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT1 high
EH – 0.7
EH + 0.7
ns
2
tw(EKO1L)
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT1 low
EL – 0.7
EL + 0.7
ns
3
tt(EKO1)
Transition time, AECLKOUT1
1
ns
4
td(EKIH-EKO1H)
Delay time, AECLKIN high to AECLKOUT1 high
1
8
ns
td(EKIL-EKO1L)
Delay time, AECLKIN low to AECLKOUT1 low
1
8
ns
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
E = the EMIF input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
EH is the high period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns and EL is the low period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns for EMIFA.
AECLKIN
5
1
4
2
3
3
AECLKOUT1
Figure 5-15. AECLKOUT1 Timing for the EMIFA Module
Table 5-20. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for AECLKOUT2 for the
EMIFA Module (1) (2) (see Figure 5-16)
NO.
(1)
(2)
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
tw(EKO2H)
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT2 high
0.5NE – 0.7
0.5NE + 0.7
ns
2
tw(EKO2L)
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT2 low
0.5NE – 0.7
0.5NE + 0.7
ns
3
tt(EKO2)
Transition time, AECLKOUT2
1
ns
4
td(EKIH-EKO2H)
Delay time, AECLKIN high to AECLKOUT2 high
1
8
ns
5
td(EKIL-EKO2L)
Delay time, AECLKIN low to AECLKOUT2 low
1
8
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
E = the EMIF input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA. N = the EMIF input clock divider; N = 1, 2,
or 4.
AECLKIN
5
4
1
2
3
3
AECLKOUT2
Figure 5-16. AECLKOUT2 Timing for the EMIFA Module
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
91
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.8
www.ti.com
External Memory Interface (EMIF)
EMIF supports a glueless interface to a variety of external devices, including:
• Pipelined synchronous-burst SRAM (SBSRAM)
• Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM)
• Asynchronous devices, including SRAM, ROM, and FIFOs
• An external shared-memory device
5.8.1
EMIF Device-Specific Information
EMIF Device Speed
The rated EMIF speed of these devices only applies to the SDRAM interface when in a system that meets
the following requirements:
• 1 chip-enable (CE) space (maximum of 2 chips) of SDRAM connected to EMIF
• up to 1 CE space of buffers connected to EMIF
• EMIF trace lengths between 1 and 3 inches
• 166-MHz SDRAM for 133-MHz operation
• 143-MHz SDRAM for 100-MHz operation
Other configurations may be possible, but timing analysis must be done to verify all AC timings are met.
Verification of AC timings is mandatory when using configurations other than those specified above. TI
recommends utilizing I/O buffer information specification (IBIS) to analyze all AC timings.
To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS
Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839).
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines
(see the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).
For more detailed information on the DM642 EMIF peripheral, see the TMS320C6000 DSP External
Memory Interface (EMIF) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU266).
92
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.8.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
EMIF Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-21. EMIFA Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0180 0000
GBLCTL
EMIFA global control
0180 0004
CECTL1
EMIFA CE1 space control
0180 0008
CECTL0
EMIFA CE0 space control
0180 000C
–
0180 0010
CECTL2
EMIFA CE2 space control
0180 0014
CECTL3
EMIFA CE3 space control
0180 0018
SDCTL
EMIFA SDRAM control
0180 001C
SDTIM
EMIFA SDRAM refresh control
0180 0020
SDEXT
EMIFA SDRAM extension
0180 0024 – 0180 003C
–
Reserved
Reserved
0180 0040
PDTCTL
Peripheral device transfer (PDT) control
0180 0044
CESEC1
EMIFA CE1 space secondary control
0180 0048
CESEC0
EMIFA CE0 space secondary control
0180 004C
–
0180 0050
CESEC2
EMIFA CE2 space secondary control
0180 0054
CESEC3
EMIFA CE3 space secondary control
0180 0058 – 0183 FFFF
–
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
COMMENTS
Reserved
Reserved
EMIF Electrical Data/Timing
Asynchronous Memory Timing
Table 5-22. Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module (1)
(see Figure 5-17 and Figure 5-18)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
(1)
(2)
(2)
3
tsu(EDV-AREH)
Setup time, AEDx valid before AARE high
4
th(AREH-EDV)
6
tsu(ARDY-EKO1H)
7
th(EKO1H-ARDY)
Hold time, AARDY valid after AECLKOUTx high
UNIT
MAX
6.5
ns
Hold time, AEDx valid after AARE high
1
ns
Setup time, AARDY valid before AECLKOUTx high
3
ns
2.5
ns
To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. AARDY is internally synchronized. The AARDY signal is only
recognized two cycles before the end of the programmed strobe time and while AARDY is low, the strobe time is extended
cycle-by-cycle. When AARDY is recognized low, the end of the strobe time is two cycles after AARDY is recognized high. To use
AARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width of the AARDY signal should be wide enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup
and hold time is met.
RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters
are programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
93
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module (1) (2) (3) (see Figure 5-17 and Figure 5-18)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
(1)
(2)
(3)
1
tosu(SELV-AREL)
Output setup time, select signals valid to AARE low
RS * E – 1.8
2
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output hold time, AARE high to select signals invalid
RH * E – 1.9
5
td(EKO1H-AREV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AARE valid
8
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Output setup time, select signals valid to AAWE low
WS * E – 2.0
9
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
Output hold time, AAWE high to select signals invalid
WH * E – 2.5
10
td(EKO1H-AWEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AAWE valid
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
1
1.3
7
ns
ns
ns
7.1
ns
RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters
are programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
E = AECLKOUT1 period in ns for EMIFA
Select signals for EMIFA include: ACEx, ABE[7:0], AEA[22:3], AAOE; and for EMIFA writes, include AED[63:0].
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Not Ready
Hold = 2
AECLKOUTx
1
2
1
2
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
BE
2
1
AEA[22:3]
Address
3
4
AED[63:0]
1
2
Read Data
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
5
5
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
7
7
6
6
AARDY
A.
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as AAOE (identified
under select signals), AARE, and AAWE, respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 5-17. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIFA
94
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Hold = 2
Not Ready
AECLKOUTx
9
8
ACEx
9
8
ABE[7:0]
BE
9
8
AEA[22:3]
Address
9
8
AED[63:0]
Write Data
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
10
10
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
7
6
7
6
AARDY
A.
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as AAOE (identified
under select signals), AARE, and AAWE, respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 5-18. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIFA
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
95
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.8.3.2
www.ti.com
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing
Table 5-24. Timing Requirements for Programmable Synchronous Interface Cycles for EMIFA Module
(see Figure 5-19)
–500, A-600
NO.
MIN
MAX
–600
–720
MIN
UNIT
MAX
6
tsu(EDV-EKOxH)
Setup time, read AEDx valid before AECLKOUTx high
3.1
2
ns
7
th(EKOxH-EDV)
Hold time, read AEDx valid after AECLKOUTx high
1.8
1.5
ns
Table 5-25. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Programmable
Synchronous Interface Cycles for EMIFA Module (1) (see Figure 5-19–Figure 5-21)
NO.
(1)
96
PARAMETER
–500, A-600
–600
–720
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.1
6.4
1.1
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
1
td(EKOxH-CEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ACEx valid
2
td(EKOxH-BEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABEx valid
3
td(EKOxH-BEIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABEx invalid
4
td(EKOxH-EAV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEAx valid
5
td(EKOxH-EAIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEAx invalid
1.1
8
td(EKOxH-ADSV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASADS/ASRE valid
1.1
6.4
1.1
4.9
ns
9
td(EKOxH-OEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASOE valid
1.1
6.4
1.1
4.9
ns
10
td(EKOxH-EDV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEDx valid
4.9
ns
11
td(EKOxH-EDIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEDx invalid
1.1
12
td(EKOxH-WEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASWE valid
1.1
6.4
1.1
1.1
6.4
ns
4.9
1.1
6.4
ns
1.1
6.4
1.1
ns
ns
4.9
ns
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
• Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
• Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
• ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the final command has
been issued (CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
• Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASADS with deselect
cycles (RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
• Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to AECLKOUT1 or AECLKOUT2
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
READ latency = 2
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
2
BE1
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
4
AEA[22:3]
EA1
5
EA2
EA3
6
AED[63:0]
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (C)
EA4
7
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
8
8
9
9
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (C)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (C)
A.
B.
C.
The read latency and the length of ACEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCRL and CEEXT fields,
respectively, in the EMIFA CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCRL = 2 and
CEEXT = 0.
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
•
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
•
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
•
ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the
final command has been issued (CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when
ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
•
Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as
ASADS with deselect cycles (RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect
cycles (RENEN = 1).
•
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to AECLKOUT1 or AECLKOUT2
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as ASADS/ASRE,
ASOE, and ASWE, respectively, during programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 5-19. Programmable Synchronous Interface Read Timing for EMIFA (With Read Latency = 2)
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
97
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
2
BE1
BE2
BE3
BE4
AEA[22:3]
4
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
10
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
10
AED[63:0]
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (C)
3
5
11
8
8
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (C)
12
12
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (C)
A.
B.
C.
The write latency and the length of ACEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields,
respectively, in the EMIFA CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 0 and
CEEXT = 0.
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
•
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
•
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
•
ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the
final command has been issued (CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when
ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
•
Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as
ASADS with deselect cycles (RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect
cycles (RENEN = 1).
•
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to AECLKOUT1 or AECLKOUT2
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as ASADS/ASRE,
ASOE, and ASWE, respectively, during programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 5-20. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA (With Write Latency = 0)
98
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Write
Latency =
1 (B)
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
2
BE1
AEA[22:3]
4
EA1
10
AED[63:0]
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
EA2
10
EA3
EA4
Q1
Q2
Q3
5
11
Q4
8
8
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (C)
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (C)
12
12
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (C)
A.
B.
C.
The write latency and the length of ACEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields,
respectively, in the EMIFA CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 1 and
CEEXT = 0.
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
•
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
•
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
•
ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the
final command has been issued (CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when
ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
•
Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as
ASADS with deselect cycles (RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect
cycles (RENEN = 1).Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface,
ASADS/ASRE acts as ASADS with deselect cycles (RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as
ASRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
•
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as ASADS/ASRE,
ASOE, and ASWE, respectively, during programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 5-21. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA (With Write Latency = 1)
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
99
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.8.3.3
www.ti.com
Synchronous DRAM Timing
Table 5-26. Timing Requirements for Synchronous DRAM Cycles for EMIFA Module (see Figure 5-22)
–500, A-600
NO.
MIN
MAX
–600
–720
MIN
UNIT
MAX
6
tsu(EDV-EKO1H)
Setup time, read AEDx valid before AECLKOUTx high
2.1
0.6
ns
7
th(EKO1H-EDV)
Hold time, read AEDx valid after AECLKOUTx high
2.8
2.1
ns
Table 5-27. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Synchronous DRAM
Cycles for EMIFA Module (see Figure 5-22–Figure 5-29)
NO.
PARAMETER
–500, A-600
–600
–720
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
1
td(EKO1H-CEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ACEx valid
2
td(EKO1H-BEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABEx valid
3
td(EKO1H-BEIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABEx invalid
4
td(EKO1H-EAV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEAx valid
5
td(EKO1H-EAIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEAx invalid
1.3
8
td(EKO1H-CASV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASDCAS valid
1.3
9
td(EKO1H-EDV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEDx valid
10
td(EKO1H-EDIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEDx invalid
1.3
11
td(EKO1H-WEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASDWE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
12
td(EKO1H-RAS)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASDRAS valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
13
td(EKO1H-ACKEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASDCKE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
14
td(EKO1H-PDTV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to APDT valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
100
6.4
1.3
1.3
6.4
ns
4.9
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
ns
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
1.3
ns
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
READ
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
2
BE1
ABE[7:0]
4
Bank
5
AEA[22:14]
4
Column
5
AEA[12:3]
4
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
5
AEA13
6
AED[63:0]
D1
7
D2
D3
D4
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
8
8
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
14
14
APDT (B)
A.
B.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
APDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTS bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter
RAM). For APDT read, data is not latched into EMIF. The PDTRL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL)
configures the latency of the APDT signal with respect to the data phase of a read transaction. The latency of the
APDT signal for a read can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTRL to 00, 01, 10, or 11, respectively.
PDTRL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22. SDRAM Read Command (CAS Latency 3) for EMIFA
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
101
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
WRITE
AECLKOUTx
1
2
2
4
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
BE1
4
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
D2
D3
D4
5
Bank
AEA[22:14]
4
5
Column
AEA[12:3]
4
5
AEA13
9
AED[63:0]
10
9
D1
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
8
8
11
11
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
14
14
APDT (B)
A.
B.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
APDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTD bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter
RAM). For APDT write, data is not driven (in High-Z). The PDTWL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL)
configures the latency of the APDT signal with respect to the data phase of a write transaction. The latency of the
APDT signal for a write transaction can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTWL to 00, 01, 10, or 11,
respectively. PDTWL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23. SDRAM Write Command for EMIFA
102
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
ACTV
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
4
Bank Activate
5
AEA[22:14]
4
Row Address
5
AEA[12:3]
4
Row Address
5
AEA13
AED[63:0]
12
12
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
A.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 5-24. SDRAM ACTV Command for EMIFA
DCAB
AECLKOUTx
1
1
4
5
12
12
11
11
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
A.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 5-25. SDRAM DCAB Command for EMIFA
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
103
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
DEAC
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
4
AEA[22:14]
5
Bank
AEA[12:3]
4
5
12
12
11
11
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
A.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 5-26. SDRAM DEAC Command for EMIFA
REFR
AECLKOUTx
1
1
12
12
8
8
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
A.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 5-27. SDRAM REFR Command for EMIFA
104
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
MRS
AECLKOUTx
1
1
4
MRS value
5
12
12
8
8
11
11
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:3]
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
A.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 5-28. SDRAM MRS Command for EMIFA
≥ TRAS cycles
End Self-Refresh
Self Refresh
AECLKOUTx
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE (A)
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE (A)
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE (A)
13
13
ASDCKE
A.
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE,
and ASDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 5-29. SDRAM Self-Refresh Timing for EMIFA
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
105
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.8.3.4
www.ti.com
HOLD/HOLDA Timing
Table 5-28. Timing Requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA Cycles for EMIFA Module (1) (see Figure 5-30)
–500, A-600
NO.
MIN
3
(1)
th(HOLDAL-HOLDL)
Hold time, HOLD low after HOLDA low
MAX
E
–600
–720
MIN
UNIT
MAX
E
ns
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
Table 5-29. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA
Cycles for EMIFA Module (1) (2) (3) (see Figure 5-30)
NO.
–500, A-600
PARAMETER
–600
–720
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
td(HOLDL-EMHZ)
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIFA Bus high impedance
2E
(4)
2E
(4)
ns
2
td(EMHZ-HOLDAL)
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low
0
2E
0
2E
ns
4
td(HOLDH-EMLZ)
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance
2E
7E
2E
7E
ns
5
td(EMLZ-HOLDAH)
Delay time, EMIFA Bus low impedance to HOLDA high
0
2E
0
2E
ns
2E
(4)
ns
2E
7E
ns
6
td(HOLDL-EKOHZ)
Delay time, HOLD low to AECLKOUTx high impedance
2E
(4)
7
td(HOLDH-EKOLZ)
Delay time, HOLD high to AECLKOUTx low impedance
2E
7E
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
EMIFA Bus consists of: ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AED[63:0], AEA[22:3], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE , ASDCKE, ASOE3, and APDT.
The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during HOLDA. If EKxHZ =
0, ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If
EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 5-30.
All pending EMIF transactions are allowed to complete before HOLDA is asserted. If no bus transactions are occurring, then the
minimum delay time can be achieved. Also, bus hold can be indefinitely delayed by setting NOHOLD = 1.
External Requestor
Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
3
HOLD
2
5
HOLDA
1
EMIF Bus (A)
4
DM642
DM642
AECLKOUTx (B)
(EKxHZ = 0)
6
AECLKOUTx (B)
(EKxHZ = 1)
A.
B.
7
EMIFA Bus consists of: ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AED[63:0], AEA[22:3], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, ASDCKE, ASOE3, and APDT.
The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during
HOLDA. If EKxHZ = 0, ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high
impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30. HOLD/HOLDA Timing for EMIFA
106
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.8.3.5
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
BUSREQ Timing
Table 5-30. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for the BUSREQ Cycles
for EMIFA Module (see Figure 5-31)
NO.
1
–500, A-600
PARAMETER
td(AEKO1H-ABUSRV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABUSREQ valid
–600
–720
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
0.6
7.1
1
5.5
ns
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ABUSREQ
Figure 5-31. BUSREQ Timing for EMIFA
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
107
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.9
www.ti.com
Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP0) Peripheral
The McASP functions as a general-purpose audio serial port optimized for the needs of multichannel
audio applications. The McASP is useful for time-division multiplexed (TDM) stream, Inter-Integrated
Sound (I2S) protocols, and intercomponent digital audio interface transmission (DIT).
5.9.1
McASP0 Device-Specific Information
The TMS320DM642 device includes one multichannel audio serial port (McASP) interface peripheral
(McASP0). The McASP is a serial port optimized for the needs of multichannel audio applications.
The McASP consists of a transmit and receive section. These sections can operate completely
independently with different data formats, separate master clocks, bit clocks, and frame syncs or
alternatively, the transmit and receive sections may be synchronized. The McASP module also includes a
pool of 16 shift registers that may be configured to operate as either transmit data, receive data, or
general-purpose I/O (GPIO).
The transmit section of the McASP can transmit data in either a time-division-multiplexed (TDM)
synchronous serial format or in a digital audio interface (DIT) format where the bit stream is encoded for
S/PDIF, AES-3, IEC-60958, CP-430 transmission. The receive section of the McASP supports the TDM
synchronous serial format.
The McASP can support one transmit data format (either a TDM format or DIT format) and one receive
format at a time. All transmit shift registers use the same format and all receive shift registers use the
same format. However, the transmit and receive formats need not be the same.
Both the transmit and receive sections of the McASP also support burst mode which is useful for
non-audio data (for example, passing control information between two DSPs).
The McASP peripheral has additional capability for flexible clock generation, and error detection/handling,
as well as error management.
For more detailed information on and the functionality of the McASP peripheral, see the TMS320C6000
DSP Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU041).
5.9.1.1
McASP Block Diagram
Figure 5-32 illustrates the major blocks along with external signals of the TMS320DM642 McASP0
peripheral; and shows the 8 serial data [AXR] pins. The McASP also includes full general-purpose I/O
(GPIO) control, so any pins not needed for serial transfers can be used for general-purpose I/O.
108
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
McASP0
DIT
RAM
Transmit
Frame Sync
Generator
Transmit
Clock Check
(HighFrequency)
Transmit
Clock
Generator
Receive
Clock Check
(HighFrequency)
Receive
Clock
Generator
Transmit
Data
Formatter
Receive
Frame Sync
Generator
INDIVIDUALLY PROGRAMMABLE TX/RX/GPIO
DMA Transmit
DMA Receive
AHCLKX0
ACLKX0
AMUTE0
AMUTEIN0
Error
Detect
Receive
Data
Formatter
AFSX0
AHCLKR0
ACLKR0
AFSR0
Serializer 0
AXR0[0]
Serializer 1
AXR0[1]
Serializer 2
AXR0[2]
Serializer 3
AXR0[3]
Serializer 4
AXR0[4]
Serializer 5
AXR0[5]
Serializer 6
AXR0[6]
Serializer 7
AXR0[7]
GPIO
Control
Figure 5-32. McASP0 Configuration
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
109
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.9.2
www.ti.com
McASP0 Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-31. McASP0 Control Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01B4 C000
PID
01B4 C004
PWRDEMU
01B4 C008
–
Reserved
01B4 C00C
–
Reserved
01B4 C010
PFUNC
Pin function register
01B4 C014
PDIR
Pin direction register
01B4 C018
PDOUT
Pin data out register
01B4 C01C
PDIN/PDSET
01B4 C020
PDCLR
01B4 C024 – 01B4 C040
–
01B4 C044
GBLCTL
Global control register
01B4 C048
AMUTE
Mute control register
01B4 C04C
DLBCTL
Digital Loop-back control register
01B4 C050
DITCTL
DIT mode control register
01B4 C054 – 01B4 C05C
–
01B4 C060
RGBLCTL
01B4 C064
RMASK
01B4 C068
RFMT
01B4 C06C
AFSRCTL
01B4 C070
ACLKRCTL
01B4 C074
AHCLKRCTL
01B4 C078
RTDM
01B4 C07C
RINTCTL
Peripheral Identification register [Register value: 0x0010 0101]
Power down and emulation management register
Pin data in / data set registerRead returns: PDINWrites affect: PDSET
Pin data clear register
Reserved
Reserved
Alias of GBLCTL containing only Receiver Reset bits, allows transmit to be reset
independently from receive.
Receiver format UNIT bit mask register
Receive bit stream format register
Receive frame sync control register
Receive clock control register
High-frequency receive clock control register
Receive TDM slot 0–31 register
Receiver interrupt control register
01B4 C080
RSTAT
Status register – Receiver
01B4 C084
RSLOT
Current receive TDM slot register
01B4 C088
RCLKCHK
01B4 C08C – 01B4 C09C
–
01B4 C0A0
XGBLCTL
01B4 C0A4
XMASK
110
Receiver clock check control register
Reserved
Alias of GBLCTL containing only Transmitter Reset bits, allows transmit to be reset
independently from receive.
Transmit format UNIT bit mask register
01B4 C0A8
XFMT
01B4 C0AC
AFSXCTL
Transmit bit stream format register
01B4 C0B0
ACLKXCTL
01B4 C0B4
AHCLKXCTL
01B4 C0B8
XTDM
Transmit TDM slot 0–31 register
01B4 C0BC
XINTCTL
Transmit interrupt control register
Transmit frame sync control register
Transmit clock control register
High-frequency Transmit clock control register
01B4 C0C0
XSTAT
Status register – Transmitter
01B4 C0C4
XSLOT
Current transmit TDM slot
01B4 C0C8
XCLKCHK
Transmit clock check control register
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-31. McASP0 Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B4 C0CC – 01B4 C0FC
–
REGISTER NAME
01B4 C100
DITCSRA0
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C104
DITCSRA1
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C108
DITCSRA2
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C10C
DITCSRA3
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C110
DITCSRA4
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C114
DITCSRA5
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Reserved
01B4 C118
DITCSRB0
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C11C
DITCSRB1
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C120
DITCSRB2
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C124
DITCSRB3
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C128
DITCSRB4
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C12C
DITCSRB5
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
01B4 C130
DITUDRA0
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C134
DITUDRA1
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C138
DITUDRA2
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C13C
DITUDRA3
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C140
DITUDRA4
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C144
DITUDRA5
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C148
DITUDRB0
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C14C
DITUDRB1
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C150
DITUDRB2
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C154
DITUDRB3
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C158
DITUDRB4
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
01B4 C15C
DITUDRB5
01B4 C160 – 01B4 C17C
–
01B4 C180
SRCTL0
Serializer 0 control register
01B4 C184
SRCTL1
Serializer 1 control register
01B4 C188
SRCTL2
Serializer 2 control register
01B4 C18C
SRCTL3
Serializer 3 control register
01B4 C190
SRCTL4
Serializer 4 control register
01B4 C194
SRCTL5
Serializer 5 control register
01B4 C198
SRCTL6
Serializer 6 control register
01B4 C19C
SRCTL7
Serializer 7 control register
Reserved
01B4 C1A0 – 01B4 C1FC
–
01B4 C200
XBUF0
Reserved
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 0
01B4 C204
XBUF1
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 1
01B4 C208
XBUF2
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 2
01B4 C20C
XBUF3
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 3
01B4 C210
XBUF4
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 4
01B4 C214
XBUF5
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 5
01B4 C218
XBUF6
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 6
01B4 C21C
XBUF7
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 7
01B4 C220 – 01B4 C27C
–
01B4 C280
RBUF0
Receive Buffer for Serializer 0
01B4 C284
RBUF1
Receive Buffer for Serializer 1
01B4 C288
RBUF2
Receive Buffer for Serializer 2
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
111
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-31. McASP0 Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B4 C28C
RBUF3
Receive Buffer for Serializer 3
REGISTER NAME
01B4 C290
RBUF4
Receive Buffer for Serializer 4
01B4 C294
RBUF5
Receive Buffer for Serializer 5
01B4 C298
RBUF6
Receive Buffer for Serializer 6
01B4 C29C
RBUF7
Receive Buffer for Serializer 7
01B4 C2A0 – 01B4 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 5-32. McASP0 Data Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
3C00 0000 – 3C0F FFFF
5.9.3
ACRONYM
RBUF/XBUFx
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
McASPx receive buffers or McASPx transmit buffers via
the Peripheral Data Bus.
(Used when RSEL or XSEL
bits = 0 [these bits are located
in the RFMT or XFMT registers,
respectively].)
McASP0 Electrical Data/Timing
5.9.3.1
Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) Timing
Table 5-33. Timing Requirements for McASP (see Figure 5-33 and Figure 5-34) (1)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
1
tc(AHCKRX)
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
2
tw(AHCKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
3
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X ext
4
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
5
tsu(FRX-CKRX)
Setup time, AFSR/X input valid before ACLKR/X latches data
6
7
8
(1)
112
th(CKRX-FRX)
tsu(AXR-CKRX)
th(CKRX-AXR)
Hold time, AFSR/X input valid after ACLKR/X latches data
Setup time, AXR input valid before ACLKR/X latches data
Hold time, AXR input valid after ACLKR/X latches data
UNIT
MAX
20
ns
10
ns
33
ns
ACLKR/X ext
16.5
ns
ACLKR/X int
5
ns
ACLKR/X ext
5
ns
ACLKR/X int
5
ns
ACLKR/X ext
5
ns
ACLKR/X int
5
ns
ACLKR/X ext
5
ns
ACLKR/X int
5
ns
ACLKR/X ext
5
ns
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-34. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McASP
(see Figure 5-33 and Figure 5-34) (1)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
9
tc(AHCKRX)
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
20
ns
10
tw(AHCKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
10
ns
11
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X int
33
ns
12
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
ACLKR/X int
16.5
ns
13
td(CKRX-FRX)
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AFSX/R output valid
ACLKR/X int
–1
5
ns
ACLKR/X ext
0
10
ns
ACLKX int
–1
5
ns
ACLKX ext
0
10
ns
ACLKR/X int
0
10
ns
ACLKR/X ext
0
10
ns
14
15
(1)
UNIT
td(CKX-AXRV)
Delay time, ACLKX transmit edge to AXR output valid
tdis(CKRX-AXRHZ)
Disable time, AXR high impedance following last data bit from
ACLKR/X transmit edge
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
113
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
2
1
2
AHCLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
4
3
4
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)†
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)‡
6
5
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
8
7
AXR[n] (Data In/Receive)
A0
A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0 C1
C2 C3
C31
†
For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for falling
edge (to shift data in).
‡ For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for rising
edge (to shift data in).
Figure 5-33. McASP Input Timings
114
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
10
10
9
AHCLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
12
11
12
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)†
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)‡
13
13
13
13
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
13
13
13
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
14
15
AXR[n] (Data Out/Transmit)
A0
A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0
C1 C2 C3
C31
†
For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for rising
edge (to shift data in).
‡ For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for falling
edge (to shift data in).
Figure 5-34. McASP Output Timings
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
115
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
5.10 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between a TMS320C6000™ DSP and other
devices compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C bus) specification version 2.1 and
connected by way of an I2C-bus. External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can
transmit/receive up to 8-bit data to/from the DSP through the I2C module.
5.10.1
I2C Device-Specific Information
The I2C module on the TMS320DM642 can be used by the DSP to control local peripherals ICs (DACs,
ADCs, etc.) while the other may be used to communicate with other controllers in a system or to
implement a user interface.
The I2C port supports:
• Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
• Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
• Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less
• Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
• Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
• Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling
• Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers
Figure 5-35 is a block diagram of the I2C0 module.
116
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
I2C0 Module
Clock
Prescale
Peripheral Clock
(CPU/4)
I2CPSCx
SCL
Noise
Filter
I2C Clock
Bit Clock
Generator
Control
I2CCLKHx
I2COARx
Own
Address
I2CSARx
Slave
Address
I2CMDRx
Mode
I2CCNTx
Data
Count
I2CCLKLx
Transmit
I2CXSRx
Transmit
Shift
I2CDXRx
Transmit
Buffer
SDA
I2C Data
Interrupt/DMA
Noise
Filter
Receive
I2CIERx
Interrupt
Enable
I2CDRRx
Receive
Buffer
I2CSTRx
Interrupt
Status
I2CRSRx
Receive
Shift
I2CISRCx
Interrupt
Source
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
Figure 5-35. I2C0 Module Block Diagram
For more detailed information on the I2C peripheral, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Inter-Integrated Circuit
(I2C) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU175).
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
117
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.10.2
www.ti.com
I2C Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-35. I2C0 Registers
118
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01B4 0000
I2COAR0
I2C0 own address register
01B4 0004
I2CIER0
I2C0 interrupt enable register
01B4 0008
I2CSTR0
I2C0 interrupt status register
01B4 000C
I2CCLKL0
I2C0 clock low-time divider register
01B4 0010
I2CCLKH0
I2C0 clock high-time divider register
01B4 0014
I2CCNT0
I2C0 data count register
01B4 0018
I2CDRR0
I2C0 data receive register
01B4 001C
I2CSAR0
I2C0 slave address register
01B4 0020
I2CDXR0
I2C0 data transmit register
01B4 0024
I2CMDR0
I2C0 mode register
I2C0 interrupt source register
01B4 0028
I2CISRC0
01B4 002C
–
01B4 0030
I2CPSC0
I2C0 prescaler register
01B4 0034
I2CPID10
I2C0 Peripheral Identification register 1 [Value: 0x0000 0101]
01B4 0038
I2CPID20
I2C0 Peripheral Identification register 2 [Value: 0x0000 0005]
01B4 003C – 01B4 3FFF
–
Reserved
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.10.3
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
I2C Electrical Data/Timing
5.10.3.1
Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing
Table 5-36. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 5-36)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
STANDARD
MODE
MIN
1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
MAX
UNIT
FAST MODE
MIN
MAX
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
2
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
3
th(SCLL-SDAL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
4
0.6
µs
4
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
5
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
(2)
6
tsu(SDAV-SDLH)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
250
7
th(SDA-SDLL)
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C bus™ devices)
0 (3)
0 (3)
8
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
4.7
1.3
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
10
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
11
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
12
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
13
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
14
tw(SP)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
15
(5)
Cb
Capacitive load for each bus line
100
4
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
ns
0.9 (4)
µs
0.6
0
400
µs
µs
50
ns
400
pF
The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered
down.
A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus™ system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH) ≥250 ns must then
be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH) = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
119
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
11
9
SDA
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
SCL
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 5-36. I2C Receive Timings
Table 5-37. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 5-37)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
PARAMETER
STANDARD
MODE
MIN
16
MAX
UNIT
FAST MODE
MIN
MAX
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
17
td(SCLH-SDAL)
Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
18
td(SDAL-SCLL)
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
4
0.6
µs
19
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
20
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
21
td(SDAV-SDLH)
Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high
250
100
22
tv(SDLL-SDAV)
Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C bus™ devices)
0
0
23
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
4.7
1.3
24
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
25
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
26
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
27
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
28
td(SCLH-SDAH)
Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)
29
Cp
Capacitance for each I2C pin
10
pF
(1)
(2)
120
4
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
ns
0.9
µs
0.6
10
µs
µs
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
26
24
SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
SCL
16
27
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 5-37. I2C Transmit Timings
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
121
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
5.11 Host-Port Interface (HPI)
The HPI is a parallel port through which a host processor can directly access the CPU memory space.
The host device functions as a master to the interface, which increases ease of access. The host and
CPU can exchange information via internal or external memory. The host also has direct access to
memory-mapped peripherals. Connectivity to the CPU memory space is provided through the enhanced
DMA (EDMA) controller. Both the host and the CPU can access the HPI control register (HPIC) and the
HPI address register (HPIA). The host can access the HPI data register (HPID) and the HPIC by using the
external data and interface control signals.
For more detailed information on the HPI peripheral, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Host Port Interface
(HPI) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU578).
5.11.1
HPI Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-38. HPI Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
–
HPID
HPI data register
Host read/write access only
0188 0000
HPIC
HPI control register
HPIC has both Host/CPU read/write access
0188 0004
HPIA
(HPIAW) (1)
HPI address register
(Write)
0188 0008
HPIA
(HPIAR) (1)
HPI address register
(Read)
0188 000C – 0189 FFFF
–
018A 0000
HPI_TRCTL
018A 0004 – 018B FFFF
–
(1)
122
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
HPIA has both Host/CPU read/write access
Reserved
HPI transfer request control
register
Reserved
Host access to the HPIA register updates both the HPIAW and HPIAR registers. The CPU can access HPIAW and HPIAR
independently.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.11.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-39. Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface Cycles (1)
Figure 5-45)
(2)
(see Figure 5-38 through
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
1
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
Setup time, select signals (3) valid before HSTROBE low
2
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Hold time, select signals (3) valid after HSTROBE low
3
tw(HSTBL)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low
4
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
10
tsu(SELV-HASL)
Setup time, select signals (3) valid before HAS low
(3)
th(HASL-SELV)
Hold time, select signals
12
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
13
th(HSTBH-HDV)
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBL)
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be inactivated
until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete properly.
18
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
19
th(HSTBL-HASL)
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
valid after HAS low
MAX
5
ns
2.4
ns
4P
11
UNIT
(4)
ns
4P
ns
5
ns
2
ns
5
ns
2.8
ns
2
ns
2
ns
2.1
ns
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0] and HR/W. For HPI16 mode only, select signals also include HHWIL.
Select the parameter value of 4P or 12.5 ns, whichever is larger.
Table 5-40. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Host-Port
Interface Cycles (1) (2) (see Figure 5-38 through Figure 5-45)
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
6
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high (3)
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read
8
td(HDV-HRDYL)
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
9
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid (HPI16 mode, 2nd half-word only)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1.3
4P + 8
ns
2
ns
-3
ns
1.5
ns
12
ns
4P + 8
ns
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
This parameter is used during HPID reads and writes. For reads, at the beginning of a word transfer (HPI32) or the first half-word
transfer (HPI16) on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and
HRDY remains high until the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads the requested data into HPID. For writes, HRDY goes
high if the internal write buffer is full.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
123
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
4
3
3
HSTROBE (A)
HCS
15
9
7
15
9
16
HD[15:0] (output)
1st half-word
6
2nd half-word
8
HRDY
A.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-38. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
HAS (A)
19
11
19
10
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE (B)
18
18
HCS
15
7
9
15
16
9
HD[15:0] (output)
6
1st half-word
8
2nd half-word
HRDY
A.
B.
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-39. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Used)
124
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
3
3
4
HSTROBE (A)
HCS
12
12
13
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st half-word
2nd half-word
14
6
HRDY
A.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-40. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS (A)
19
11
11
10
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
3
4
HSTROBE (B)
18
18
HCS
12
13
12
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st half-word
6
2nd half-word
14
HRDY
A.
B.
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-41. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Used)
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
125
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
HAS
1
2
1
2
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
3
HSTROBE (A)
HCS
7
9
15
HD[31:0] (output)
6
8
HRDY
A.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-42. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS (A)
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
10
HR/W
18
3
HSTROBE (B)
HCS
7
9
15
HD[31:0] (output)
6
8
HRDY
A.
B.
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-43. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Used)
126
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
HAS
1
2
1
2
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
3
HSTROBE (A)
HCS
12
13
HD[31:0] (input)
6
14
HRDY
A.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-44. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS (A)
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
10
HR/W
3
18
HSTROBE (B)
HCS
12
13
HD[31:0] (input)
6
14
HRDY
A.
B.
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 5-45. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Used)
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
127
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
5.12 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)
The PCI port for the TMS320C6000 supports connection of the DSP to a PCI host via the integrated PCI
master/slave bus interface. For the C64x devices, like the DM642, the PCI port interfaces to the DSP via
the EDMA internal address generation hardware. This architecture allows for both PCI Master and Slave
transactions, while keeping the EDMA channel resources available for other applications.
5.12.1
PCI Device-Specific Information
On the DM642 device, the PCI interface is multiplexed with the 32-bit Host Port Interface (HPI), or with a
combination of 16-bit HPI and EMAC/MDIO. This provides the following flexibility options to the user:
• 32-bit 66 MHz PCI bus
• 32-bit HPI
• Combination of 16-bit HPI and EMAC/MDIO
For more detailed information on the PCI port peripheral module, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Peripheral
Component Interconnect (PCI) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU581).
5.12.2
PCI Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-41. PCI Peripheral Registers
128
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C0 0000
RSTSRC
REGISTER NAME
DSP Reset source/status register
01C0 0004
–
01C0 0008
PCIIS
Reserved
PCI interrupt source register
01C0 000C
PCIIEN
PCI interrupt enable register
01C0 0010
DSPMA
DSP master address register
01C0 0014
PCIMA
PCI master address register
01C0 0018
PCIMC
PCI master control register
01C0 001C
CDSPA
Current DSP address register
01C0 0020
CPCIA
Current PCI address register
01C0 0024
CCNT
Current byte count register
01C0 0028
–
Reserved
01C0 002C – 01C1 FFEF
–
Reserved
0x01C1 FFF0
HSR
0x01C1 FFF4
HDCR
Host-to-DSP control register
0x01C1 FFF8
DSPP
DSP page register
Host status register
0x01C1 FFFC
–
01C2 0000
EEADD
EEPROM address register
01C2 0004
EEDAT
EEPROM data register
EEPROM control register
01C2 0008
EECTL
01C2 000C – 01C2 FFFF
–
01C3 0000
PCI_TRCTL
01C3 0004 – 01C3 FFFF
–
Reserved
Reserved
PCI transfer request control register
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.12.3
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
PCI Electrical Data/Timing
5.12.3.1
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing
Table 5-42. Timing Requirements for PCLK (1)
(2)
(see Figure 5-46)
–500, A-600
[33 MHz]
NO.
–600, –720
[66 MHz]
MIN MAX
30 (or 4P (3))
15 (or 4P (3))
ns
Pulse duration, PCLK high
11
6
ns
tw(PCLKL)
Pulse duration, PCLK low
11
tsr(PCLK)
Δv/Δt slew rate, PCLK
1
tc(PCLK)
Cycle time, PCLK
2
tw(PCLKH)
3
4
(1)
(2)
(3)
UNIT
MIN MAX
6
1
4
ns
1.5
4
V/ns
For 3.3-V operation, the reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VILP MAX and VIHP MIN.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
Select the parameter value, whichever is larger.
1
0.4 DVDD V MIN
Peak to Peak for
3.3V signaling
4
2
PCLK
3
4
Figure 5-46. PCLK Timing
Table 5-43. Timing Requirements for PCI Reset (see Figure 5-47)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
1
tw(PRST)
Pulse duration, PRST
2
tsu(PCLKA-PRSTH)
Setup time, PCLK active before PRST high
UNIT
MAX
1
ms
100
µs
PCLK
1
PRST
2
Figure 5-47. PCI Reset (PRST) Timing
Table 5-44. Timing Requirements for PCI Inputs (see Figure 5-48)
NO.
–500, A-600
–600
–720
33 MHz
66 MHz
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
4
tsu(IV-PCLKH)
Setup time, input valid before PCLK high
7
3
ns
5
th(IV-PCLKH)
Hold time, input valid after PCLK high
0
0
ns
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
129
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
PCLK
4
5
PCI Input
Inputs Valid
Figure 5-48. PCI Input Timing (33-/66-MHz)
Table 5-45. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PCI Outputs
(see Figure 5-49)
NO.
parameter
–500, A-600
–600
–720
33 MHz
66 MHz
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
td(PCLKH-OV)
Delay time, PCLK high to output valid
2
11
2
6
2
td(PCLKH-OLZ)
Delay time, PCLK high to output low impedance
2
3
td(PCLKH-OHZ)
Delay time, PCLK high to output high impedance
2
28
ns
ns
14
ns
PCLK
1
1
PCI Output
2
3
Figure 5-49. PCI Output Timing (33-/66-MHz)
130
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-46. Timing Requirements for Serial EEPROM Interface (see Figure 5-50)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
8
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
Setup time, XSP_DI valid before XSP_CLK high
9
th(CLKH-DIV)
Hold time, XSP_DI valid after XSP_CLK high
UNIT
MAX
50
ns
0
ns
Table 5-47. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Serial EEPROM
Interface (1) (see Figure 5-50)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
(1)
UNIT
TYP
MAX
1
tw(CSL)
Pulse duration, XSP_CS low
4092P
ns
2
td(CLKL-CSL)
Delay time, XSP_CLK low to XSP_CS low
3
td(CSH-CLKH)
Delay time, XSP_CS high to XSP_CLK high
0
ns
2046P
4
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
ns
5
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK low
2046P
ns
6
tosu(DOV-CLKH)
Output setup time, XSP_DO valid before XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
7
toh(CLKH-DOV)
Output hold time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
2
1
XSP_CS
3
4
5
XSP_CLK
7
6
XSP_DO
8
9
XSP_DI
Figure 5-50. PCI Serial EEPROM Interface Timing
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
131
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
5.13 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)
The McBSP provides these functions:
• Full-duplex communication
• Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream
• Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit
• Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially
connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices
• External shift clock or an internal, programmable frequency shift clock for data transfer
For more detailed information on the McBSP peripheral, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Multichannel
Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU580).
5.13.1
McBSP Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-48. McBSP 0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
018C 0000
DRR0
McBSP0 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3000 0000 – 0x33FF FFFF
DRR0
McBSP0 data receive register via Peripheral Bus
018C 0004
DXR0
McBSP0 data transmit register via Configuration Bus
0x3000 0000 – 0x33FF FFFF
DXR0
McBSP0 data transmit register via Peripheral Bus
018C 0008
SPCR0
018C 000C
RCR0
McBSP0 receive control register
018C 0010
XCR0
McBSP0 transmit control register
018C 0014
SRGR0
018C 0018
MCR0
018C 001C
RCERE00
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
018C 0020
XCERE00
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
018C 0024
PCR0
018C 0028
RCERE10
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
018C 002C
XCERE10
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
018C 0030
RCERE20
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
018C 0034
XCERE20
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
McBSP0 serial port control register
McBSP0 sample rate generator register
McBSP0 multichannel control register
McBSP0 pin control register
018C 0038
RCERE30
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
018C 003C
XCERE30
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
018C 0040 – 018F FFFF
–
132
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register; they
cannot write to it.
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-49. McBSP 1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0190 0000
DRR1
McBSP1 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3400 0000 – 0x37FF FFFF
DRR1
McBSP1 data receive register via peripheral bus
0190 0004
DXR1
McBSP1 data transmit register via configuration bus
0x3400 0000 – 0x37FF FFFF
DXR1
McBSP1 data transmit register via peripheral bus
0190 0008
SPCR1
0190 000C
RCR1
McBSP1 receive control register
0190 0010
XCR1
McBSP1 transmit control register
0190 0014
SRGR1
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register; they
cannot write to it.
McBSP1 serial port control register
McBSP1 sample rate generator register
0190 0018
MCR1
0190 001C
RCERE01
McBSP1 multichannel control register
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
0190 0020
XCERE01
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
0190 0024
PCR1
0190 0028
RCERE11
McBSP1 pin control register
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
0190 002C
XCERE11
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
0190 0030
RCERE21
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
0190 0034
XCERE21
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
0190 0038
RCERE31
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
0190 003C
XCERE31
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
0190 0040 – 0193 FFFF
–
Reserved
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
133
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.13.2
www.ti.com
McBSP Electrical Data/Timing
5.13.2.1
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 5-50. Timing Requirements for McBSP (1) (see Figure 5-51)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
4P or 6.67 (2)
(3)
ns
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
0.5tc(CKRX) –1 (4)
ns
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
134
CLKR int
9
CLKR ext
1.3
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
8
CLKR ext
0.9
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
3.1
CLKX int
9
CLKX ext
1.3
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
Use whichever value is greater. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock
source. The minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA
limitations and AC timing requirements.
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-51. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP (1)
(see Figure 5-51)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X
generated from CLKS input
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
10
6.67 (3) (4)
(5)
ns
ns
C + 1 (6)
ns
CLKR int
–2.1
3
ns
CLKX int
–1.7
3
CLKX ext
1.7
9
CLKX int
–3.9
4
CLKX ext
–2.1
9
CLKX int
–3.9 + D1 (7)
4 + D2 (7)
CLKX ext
–2.1 + D1
(7)
9 + D2 (7)
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
–2.3 + D1 (8)
5.6 + D2 (8)
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
1.9 + D1 (8)
9 + D2 (8)
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data
bit from CLKX high
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
td(FXH-DXV)
MAX
1.4
4P or
UNIT
C – 1 (6)
9
14
(2)
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
135
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
CLKS
1
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
7
DR
8
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
3
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)
14
13 (A)
Bit(n-1)
12
Bit 0
DX
A.
13 (A)
(n-2)
(n-3)
Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bit only when XDATDLY ≠ 0.
Figure 5-51. McBSP Timing
Table 5-52. Timing Requirements for FSR When GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 5-52)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tsu(FRH-CKSH)
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
4
ns
2
th(CKSH-FRH)
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
4
ns
CLKS
1
2
FSR external
CLKR/X (no need to resync)
CLKR/X (needs resync)
Figure 5-52. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1
136
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-53. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (1)
(see Figure 5-53)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
UNIT
MASTER
MIN
4
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
5
th(CKXL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
(1)
(2)
(2)
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 5-54. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI
Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (1) (2) (see Figure 5-53)
NO.
1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MASTER (3)
MIN
MAX
T–2
T+3
L – 2.5
L+3
–2
4
L–2
L+3
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low (4)
th(CKXL-FXL)
(5)
2
td(FXL-CKXH)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX low
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from FSX high
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
ns
ns
12P + 2.8 20P + 17
ns
ns
4P + 3 12P + 17
ns
8P + 1.8 16P + 17
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
S = Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input
on FSX and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 5-53. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
137
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-55. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (1)
(see Figure 5-54)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
5
th(CKXH-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
(1)
(2)
(2)
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 5-56. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI
Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (1) (2) (see Figure 5-54)
NO.
1
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MASTER (3)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low (4)
th(CKXL-FXL)
(5)
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
L–2
L+3
MIN
MAX
ns
T – 2.5
T+3
ns
2
td(FXL-CKXH)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
–2
4 12P + 3 20P + 17
ns
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
–2
4 12P + 3 20P + 17
ns
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
6
7
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
H–2
H+4
8P + 2 16P + 17
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
S = Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input
on FSX and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
6
Bit 0
7
FSX
DX
3
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 5-54. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
138
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-57. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (1)
(see Figure 5-55)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
5
th(CKXH-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
(1)
(2)
(2)
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 5-58. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI
Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (1) (2) (see Figure 5-55)
NO.
1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MASTER (3)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high (4)
th(CKXH-FXL)
(5)
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
T–2
T+3
H – 2.5
H+3
MIN
MAX
ns
2
td(FXL-CKXL)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX high
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from FSX high
4P + 3
12P + 17
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
8P + 2
16P + 17
ns
–2
H–2
ns
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
H+3
ns
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
S = Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input
on FSX and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 5-55. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
139
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-59. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (1)
(see Figure 5-56)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
5
th(CKXH-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
(1)
(2)
(2)
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 5-60. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI
Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (1) (2) (see Figure 5-56)
NO.
1
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MASTER (3)
MIN
MAX
H–2
H+3
T – 2.5
T + 1.5
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high (4)
th(CKXH-FXL)
(5)
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
ns
2
td(FXL-CKXL)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
–2
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
ns
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX high
–2
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
ns
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
16P + 17
ns
6
7
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
L–2
L+4
ns
8P + 2
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
S = Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input
on FSX and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
6
DX
7
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 5-56. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
140
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.14 Video Port
Each Video Port is capable of sending and receiving digital video data. The Video Ports are also capable
of capturing/displaying RAW data. The Video Port peripherals follow video standards such as BT.656 and
SMPTE296.
5.14.1
Video Port Device-Specific Information
The TMS320DM642 device has three video port peripherals.
The video port peripheral can operate as a video capture port, video display port, or as a transport stream
interface (TSI) capture port.
The port consists of two channels: A and B. A 5120-byte capture/display buffer is splittable between the
two channels. The entire port (both channels) is always configured for either video capture or display only.
Separate data pipelines control the parsing and formatting of video capture or display data for each of the
BT.656, Y/C, raw video, and TSI modes.
For video capture operation, the video port may operate as two 8/10-bit channels of BT.656 or raw video
capture; or as a single channel of 8/10-bit BT.656, 8/10-bit raw video, 16/20-bit Y/C video, 16/20-bit raw
video, or 8-bit TSI.
For video display operation, the video port may operate as a single channel of 8/10-bit BT.656; or as a
single channel of 8/10-bit BT.656, 8/10-bit raw video, 16/20 bit Y/C video, or 16/20-bit raw video. It may
also operate in a two channel 8/10-bit raw mode in which the two channels are locked to the same timing.
Channel B is not used during single channel operation.
For more detailed information on the DM642 Video Port peripherals, see the TMS320C64x DSP Video
Port/VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC) Port Reference Guide (literature number SPRU629).
5.14.2
Video Port Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-61. Video Port 0, 1, and 2 (VP0, VP1, and VP2) Control Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
VP0
VP1
VP2
01C4 0000
01C4 4000
01C4 8000
VP_PIDx
Video Port Peripheral Identification Register
01C4 0004
01C4 4004
01C4 8004
VP_PCRx
Video Port Peripheral Control Register
01C4 0008
01C4 4008
01C4 8008
–
Reserved
01C4 000C
01C4 400C
01C4 800C
–
Reserved
01C4 0020
01C4 4020
01C4 8020
VP_PFUNCx
Video Port Pin Function Register
01C4 0024
01C4 4024
01C4 8024
VP_PDIRx
Video Port Pin Direction Register
Video Port Pin Data Input Register
01C4 0028
01C4 4028
01C4 8028
VP_PDINx
01C4 002C
01C4 402C
01C4 802C
VP_PDOUTx
Video Port Pin Data Output Register
01C4 0030
01C4 4030
01C4 8030
VP_PDSETx
Video Port Pin Data Set Register
01C4 0034
01C4 4034
01C4 8034
VP_PDCLRx
Video Port Pin Data Clear Register
01C4 0038
01C4 4038
01C4 8038
VP_PIENx
Video Port Pin Interrupt Enable Register
01C4 003C
01C4 403C
01C4 803C
VP_PIPOx
Video Port Pin Interrupt Polarity Register
01C4 0040
01C4 4040
01C4 8040
VP_PISTATx
Video Port Pin Interrupt Status Register
Video Port Pin Interrupt Clear Register
01C4 0044
01C4 4044
01C4 8044
VP_PICLRx
01C4 00C0
01C4 40C0
01C4 80C0
VP_CTLx
Video Port Control Register
01C4 00C4
01C4 40C4
01C4 80C4
VP_STATx
Video Port Status Register
01C4 00C8
01C4 40C8
01C4 80C8
VP_IEx
Video Port Interrupt Enable Register
01C4 00CC
01C4 40CC
01C4 80CC
VP_ISx
Video Port interrupt Status Register
01C4 0100
01C4 4100
01C4 8100
VC_STATx
Video Capture Channel A Status Register
01C4 0104
01C4 4104
01C4 8104
VC_CTLx
Video Capture Channel A Control Register
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
141
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-61. Video Port 0, 1, and 2 (VP0, VP1, and VP2) Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
VP0
VP1
VP2
ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
01C4 0108
01C4 4108
01C4 8108
VC_ASTRTx
Video Capture Channel A Field 1 Start Register
01C4 010C
01C4 410C
01C4 810C
VC_ASTOPx
Video Capture Channel A Field 1 Stop Register
01C4 0110
01C4 4110
01C4 8110
VC_ASTRTx
Video Capture Channel A Field 2 Start Register
01C4 0114
01C4 4114
01C4 8114
VC_ASTOPx
Video Capture Channel A Field 2 Stop Register
01C4 0118
01C4 4118
01C4 8118
VC_AVINTx
Video Capture Channel A Vertical Interrupt Register
01C4 011C
01C4 411C
01C4 811C
VC_ATHRLDx
Video Capture Channel A Threshold Register
01C4 0120
01C4 4120
01C4 8120
VC_AEVTCTx
Video Capture Channel A Event Count Register
01C4 0140
01C4 4140
01C4 8140
VC_BSTATx
Video Capture Channel B Status Register
01C4 0144
01C4 4144
01C4 8144
VC_BCTLx
Video Capture Channel B Control Register
01C4 0148
01C4 4148
01C4 8148
VC_BSTRTx
Video Capture Channel B Field 1 Start Register
01C4 014C
01C4 414C
01C4 814C
VC_BSTOPx
Video Capture Channel B Field 1 Stop Register
01C4 0150
01C4 4150
01C4 8150
VC_BSTRTx
Video Capture Channel B Field 2 Start Register
01C4 0154
01C4 4154
01C4 8154
VC_BSTOPx
Video Capture Channel B Field 2 Stop Register
Video Capture Channel B Vertical Interrupt Register
01C4 0158
01C4 4158
01C4 8158
VC_BVINTx
01C4 015C
01C4 415C
01C4 815C
VC_BTHRLDx
Video Capture Channel B Threshold Register
01C4 0160
01C4 4160
01C4 8160
VC_BEVTCTx
Video Capture Channel B Event Count Register
01C4 0180
01C4 4180
01C4 8180
TSI_CTLx
01C4 0184
01C4 4184
01C4 8184
TSI_CLKINITLx
TCI Clock Initialization LSB Register
01C4 0188
01C4 4188
01C4 8188
TSI_CLKINITMx
TCI Clock Initialization MSB Register
01C4 018C
01C4 418C
01C4 818C
TSI_STCLKLx
TCI System Time Clock LSB Register
01C4 0190
01C4 4190
01C4 8190
TSI_STCLKMx
TCI System Time Clock MSB Register
01C4 0194
01C4 4194
01C4 8194
TSI_STCMPLx
TCI System Time Clock Compare LSB Register
01C4 0198
01C4 4198
01C4 8198
TSI_STCMPMx
TCI System Time Clock Compare MSB Register
01C4 019C
01C4 419C
01C4 819C
TSI_STMSKLx
TCI System Time Clock Compare Mask LSB Register
01C4 01A0
01C4 41A0
01C4 81A0
TSI_STMSKMx
TCI System Time Clock Compare Mask MSB Register
01C4 01A4
01C4 41A4
01C4 81A4
TSI_TICKSx
TCI System Time Clock Ticks Interrupt Register
01C4 0200
01C4 4200
01C4 8200
VD_STATx
Video Display Status Register
01C4 0204
01C4 4204
01C4 8204
VD_CTLx
Video Display Control Register
01C4 0208
01C4 4208
01C4 8208
VD_FRMSZx
Video Display Frame Size Register
01C4 020C
01C4 420C
01C4 820C
VD_HBLNKx
Video Display Horizontal Blanking Register
01C4 0210
01C4 4210
01C4 8210
VD_VBLKS1x
Video Display Field 1 Vertical Blanking Start Register
01C4 0214
01C4 4214
01C4 8214
VD_VBLKE1x
Video Display Field 1 Vertical Blanking End Register
01C4 0218
01C4 4218
01C4 8218
VD_VBLKS2x
Video Display Field 2 Vertical Blanking Start Register
01C4 021C
01C4 421C
01C4 821C
VD_VBLKE2x
Video Display Field 2 Vertical Blanking End Register
01C4 0220
01C4 4220
01C4 8220
VD_IMGOFF1x
01C4 0224
01C4 4224
01C4 8224
VD_IMGSZ1x
TCI Capture Control Register
Video Display Field 1 Image Offset Register
Video Display Field 1 Image Size Register
01C4 0228
01C4 4228
01C4 8228
VD_IMGOFF2x
01C4 022C
01C4 422C
01C4 822C
VD_IMGSZ2x
Video Display Field 2 Image Offset Register
01C4 0230
01C4 4230
01C4 8230
VD_FLDT1x
Video Display Field 1 Timing Register
01C4 0234
01C4 4234
01C4 8234
VD_FLDT2x
Video Display Field 2 Timing Register
Video Display Field 2 Image Size Register
01C4 0238
01C4 4238
01C4 8238
VD_THRLDx
Video Display Threshold Register
01C4 023C
01C4 423C
01C4 823C
VD_HSYNCx
Video Display Horizontal Synchronization Register
01C4 0240
01C4 4240
01C4 8240
VD_VSYNS1x
Video Display Field 1 Vertical Synchronization Start Register
01C4 0244
01C4 4244
01C4 8244
VD_VSYNE1x
Video Display Field 1 Vertical Synchronization End Register
01C4 0248
01C4 4248
01C4 8248
VD_VSYNS2x
Video Display Field 2 Vertical Synchronization Start Register
01C4 024C
01C4 424C
01C4 824C
VD_VSYNE2x
Video Display Field 2 Vertical Synchronization End Register
142
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-61. Video Port 0, 1, and 2 (VP0, VP1, and VP2) Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
VP0
VP1
VP2
01C4 0250
01C4 4250
01C4 8250
VD_RELOADx
Video Display Counter Reload Register
01C4 0254
01C4 4254
01C4 8254
VD_DISPEVTx
Video Display Display Event Register
01C4 0258
01C4 4258
01C4 8258
VD_CLIPx
01C4 025C
01C4 425C
01C4 825C
VD_DEFVALx
01C4 0260
01C4 4260
01C4 8260
VD_VINTx
Video Display Vertical Interrupt Register
01C4 0264
01C4 4264
01C4 8264
VD_FBITx
Video Display Field Bit Register
Video Display Clipping Register
Video Display Default Display Value Register
01C4 0268
01C4 4268
01C4 8268
VD_VBIT1x
Video Display Field 1Vertical Blanking Bit Register
01C4 026C
01C4 426C
01C4 826C
VD_VBIT2x
Video Display Field 2Vertical Blanking Bit Register
7400 000
7800 0000
7C00 0000
Y_RSCA
7400 0008
7800 0008
7C00 0008
CB_SRCA
CB FIFO Source Register A
7400 0010
7800 0010
7C00 0010
CR_SRCA
CR FIFO Source Register A
7400 0020
7800 0020
7C00 0020
Y_DSTA
Y FIFO Destination Register A
7400 0028
7800 0028
7C00 0028
CB_DST
CB FIFO Destination Register
7400 0030
7800 0030
7C00 0030
CR_DST
CR FIFO Destination Register
7600 0000
7A00 0000
7E00 0000
Y_SRCB
Y FIFO Source Register B
7600 0008
7A00 0008
7E00 0008
CB_SRCB
CB FIFO Source Register b
7600 0010
7A00 0010
7E00 0010
CR_SRCB
CR FIFO Source Register B
7600 0020
7A00 0020
7E00 0020
Y_DSTB
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Y FIFO Source Register A
Y FIFO Destination Register B
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
143
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.14.3
www.ti.com
Video Port (VP0, VP1, VP2) Electrical Data/Timing
5.14.3.1
VCLKIN Timing (Video Capture Mode)
Table 5-62. Timing Requirements for Video Capture Mode for VPxCLKINx (1)
(see Figure 5-57)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(VKI)
Cycle time, VPxCLKINx
12.5
ns
2
tw(VKIH)
Pulse duration, VPxCLKINx high
5.4
ns
3
tw(VKIL)
Pulse duration, VPxCLKINx low
5.4
ns
tt(VKI)
Transition time, VPxCLKINx
4
(1)
3
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
4
1
2
3
VPxCLKINx
4
Figure 5-57. Video Port Capture VPxCLKINx TIming
144
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.14.3.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Video Data and Control Timing (Video Capture Mode)
Table 5-63. Timing Requirements in Video Capture Mode for Video Data and Control Inputs
(see Figure 5-58)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tsu(VDATV-VKIH)
Setup time, VPxDx valid before VPxCLKINx high
2.9
ns
2
th(VDATV-VKIH)
Hold time, VPxDx valid after VPxCLKINx high
0.5
ns
3
tsu(VCTLV-VKIH)
Setup time, VPxCTLx valid before VPxCLKINx high
2.9
ns
4
th(VCTLV-VKIH)
Hold time, VPxCTLx valid after VPxCLKINx high
0.5
ns
VPxCLKINx
1
2
VPxD[19:0] (Input)
3
4
VPxCTLx (Input)
Figure 5-58. Video Port Capture Data and Control Input Timing
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
145
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.14.3.3
www.ti.com
VCLKIN Timing (Video Display Mode)
Table 5-64. Timing Requirements for Video Display Mode for VPxCLKINx (1) (see Figure 5-59)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
1
tc(VKI)
Cycle time, VPxCLKINx
2
tw(VKIH)
3
tw(VKIL)
4
tt(VKI)
Transition time, VPxCLKINx
(1)
UNIT
MAX
9
ns
Pulse duration, VPxCLKINx high
4.1
ns
Pulse duration, VPxCLKINx low
4.1
ns
3
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
4
1
2
3
VPxCLKINx
4
Figure 5-59. Video Port Display VPxCLKINx Timing
5.14.3.4
Video Control Input/Output and Video Display Data Output Timing With Respect to VPxCLKINx
and VPxCLKOUTx (Video Display Mode)
Table 5-65. Timing Requirements in Video Display Mode for Video Control Input Shown With Respect to
VPxCLKINx and VPxCLKOUTx (see Figure 5-60)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
13
tsu(VCTLV-VKIH)
Setup time, VPxCTLx valid before VPxCLKINx high
2.9
ns
14
th(VCTLV-VKIH)
Hold time, VPxCTLx valid after VPxCLKINx high
0.5
ns
15
tsu(VCTLV-VKOH)
Setup time, VPxCTLx valid before VPxCLKOUTx high (1)
7.4
ns
–0.9
ns
16
(1)
146
th(VCTLV-VKOH)
Hold time, VPxCTLx valid after VPxCLKOUTx high
(1)
Assuming non-inverted VPxCLKOUTx signal.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-66. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions in Video Display Mode
for Video Data and Control Output Shown With Respect to VPxCLKINx and VPxCLKOUTx (1) (2)
(see Figure 5-60)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
V – 0.7
V + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, VPxCLKOUTx high
VH – 0.7
VH + 0.7
ns
tw(VKOL)
Pulse duration, VPxCLKOUTx low
VL – 0.7
VL + 0.7
ns
tt(VKO)
Transition time, VPxCLKOUTx
1.8
ns
td(VKIH-VKOH)
Delay time, VPxCLKINx high to VPxCLKOUTx high (3)
1.1
5.7
ns
1
tc(VKO)
Cycle time, VPxCLKOUTx
2
tw(VKOH)
3
4
5
(3)
6
td(VKIL-VKOL)
Delay time, VPxCLKINx low to VPxCLKOUTx low
1.1
5.7
ns
7
td(VKIH-VKOL)
Delay time, VPxCLKINx high to VPxCLKOUTx low
1.1
5.7
ns
8
td(VKIL-VKOH)
Delay time, VPxCLKINx low to VPxCLKOUTx high
1.1
5.7
ns
9
td(VKIH-VPOUTV)
Delay time, VPxCLKINx high to VPxOUT valid (4)
9
ns
(4)
10
td(VKIH-VPOUTIV)
Delay time, VPxCLKINx high to VPxOUT invalid
11
td(VKOH-VPOUTV)
Delay time, VPxCLKOUTx high to VPxOUT valid (1)
12
td(VKOH-VPOUTIV)
Delay time, VPxCLKOUTx high to VPxOUT invalid (1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
UNIT
1.7
(4)
ns
4.3
(4)
–0.2
ns
ns
V = the video input clock (VPxCLKINx) period in ns.
VH is the high period of V (video input clock period) in ns and VL is the low period of V (video input clock period) in ns.
Assuming non-inverted VPxCLKOUTx signal.
VPxOUT consists of VPxCTLx and VPxD[19:0]
VPxCLKINx
5
2
1
6
3
VPxCLKOUTx
[VCLK2P = 0]
4
4
7
8
VPxCLKOUTx
(Inverted)
[VCLK2P = 1]
12
11
VPxCTLx,V
PxD[19:0]
(Outputs)
10
9
15
16
14
13
VPxCTLx
(Input)
Figure 5-60. Video Port Display Data Output Timing and Control Input/Output Timing With Respect to
VPxCLKINx and VPxCLKOUTx
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
147
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.14.3.5
www.ti.com
Video Dual-Display Sync Mode Timing (With Respect to VPxCLKINx)
Table 5-67. Timing Requirements for Dual-Display Sync Mode for VPxCLKINx (see Figure 5-61)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
1
tskr(VKI)
Skew rate, VPxCLKINx before VPyCLKINy
UNIT
MAX
±500
ps
VPxCLKINx
1
VPyCLKINy
Figure 5-61. Video Port Dual-Display Sync Timing
148
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.15 VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC)
The VIC can be used in conjunction with the Video Ports (VPs) to maintain synchronization of a video
stream. The VIC can also be used to control a VCXO to adjust the pixel clock rate to a video port.
5.15.1
VIC Device-Specific Information
The VCXO interpolated control (VIC) port provides digital-to-analog conversation with resolution from
9-bits to up to 16-bits. The output of the VIC is a single bit interpolated D/A output (VDAC pin).
Typical D/A converters provide a discrete output level for every value of the digital word that is being
converted. This is a problem for digital words that are long. This is avoided in a Sigma Delta type D/A
converter by choosing a few widely spaced output levels and interpolating values between them. The
interpolating mechanism causes the output to oscillate rapidly between the levels in such a manner that
the average output represents the value of input code.
In the VIC, two output levels are chosen (0 and 1), and Sigma Delta interpolation scheme is implemented
to interpolate between these levels with a rapidly changing signal. The frequency of interpolation is
dependent on the resolution needed.
When the video port is used in transport stream interface (TSI) mode, the VIC port is used to control the
system clock, VCXO, for MPEG transport stream.
The VIC supports the following features:
• Single interpolation for D/A conversion
• Programmable precision from 9-to-16 bits
• Interface for register accesses
For more detailed information on the DM642 VCXO interpolated control (VIC) peripheral, see the
TMS320C64x DSP Video Port/VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC) Port Reference Guide (literature number
SPRU629).
5.15.2
VIC Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-68. VCXO Interpolated Control (VIC) Port Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C4 C000
VICCTL
REGISTER NAME
VIC control register
01C4 C004
VICIN
VIC input register
01C4 C008
VPDIV
VIC clock divider register
01C4 C00C – 01C4 FFFF
–
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
149
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.15.3
5.15.3.1
www.ti.com
VIC Electrical Data/Timing
STCLK Timing
Table 5-69. Timing Requirments for STCLK (1) (see Figure 5-62)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
1
tc(STCLK)
Cycle time, STCLK
2
tw(STCLKH)
3
4
(1)
UNIT
MAX
33.3
ns
Pulse duration, STCLK high
16
ns
tw(STCLKL)
Pulse duration, STCLK low
16
tt(STCLK)
Transition time, STCLK
ns
3
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
4
1
2
3
STCLK
4
Figure 5-62. STCLK Timing
150
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.16 Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)
The EMAC controls the flow of packet data from the DSP to the PHY.
5.16.1
EMAC Device-Specific Information
The ethernet media access controller (EMAC) provides an efficient interface between the DM642 DSP
core processor and the network. The DM642 EMAC support both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX, or
10 Mbits/second (Mbps) and 100 Mbps in either half- or full-duplex, with hardware flow control and quality
of service (QOS) support. The DM642 EMAC makes use of a custom interface to the DSP core that
allows efficient data transmission and reception.
The EMAC controls the flow of packet data from the DSP to the PHY. The MDIO module controls PHY
configuration and status monitoring.
Both the EMAC and the MDIO modules interface to the DSP through a custom interface that allows
efficient data transmission and reception. This custom interface is referred to as the EMAC control
module, and is considered integral to the EMAC/MDIO peripheral. The control module is also used to
control device reset, interrupts, and system priority.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) / Management Data Input/Output
(MDIO) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU628) describes the DM642 EMAC peripheral in
detail. Some of the features documented in this peripheral reference guide are not supported on the
DM642 at this time. The DM642 supports one receive channel and does not support receive quality of
service (QOS). For a list of supported registers and register fields, see Table 5-70 [Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
Control Registers] and Table 5-71 [EMAC Statistics Registers] in this data manual.
5.16.2
EMAC Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-70. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01C8 0000
TXIDVER
01C8 0004
TXCONTROL
Transmit Identification and Version Register
01C8 0008
TXTEARDOWN
01C8 000C
–
Transmit Control Register
Transmit Teardown Register
Reserved
01C8 0010
RXIDVER
01C8 0014
RXCONTROL
Receive Identification and Version Register
01C8 0018
RXTEARDOWN
01C8 001C – 01C8 00FF
–
01C8 0100
RXMBPENABLE
Receive Multicast/Broadcast/Promiscuous Channel Enable Register
(The RXQOSEN field is reserved and only supports writes of 0. The PROMCH,
BROADCH, and MUCTCH bit fields only support writes of 0.)
01C8 0104
RXUNICASTSET
Receive Unicast Set Register
(Bits 7–1 are reserved and only support writes of 0.)
01C8 0108
RXUNICASTCLEAR
Receive Unicast Clear Register
(Bits 7–1 are reserved and only support writes of 0.)
Receive Teardown Register
(RXTDNCH field only supports writes of 0.)
Reserved
01C8 010C
RXMAXLEN
01C8 0110
RXBUFFEROFFSET
01C8 0114
RXFILTERLOWTHRESH
01C8 0118 – 01C8 011F
–
01C8 0120
RX0FLOWTHRESH
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Receive Control Register
Receive Maximum Length Register
Receive Buffer Offset Register
Receive Filter Low Priority Packets Threshold Register
Reserved
Receive Channel 0 Flow Control Threshold Register
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
151
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-70. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0124
RX1FLOWTHRESH
01C8 0128
RX2FLOWTHRESH
01C8 012C
RX3FLOWTHRESH
01C8 0130
RX4FLOWTHRESH
01C8 0134
RX5FLOWTHRESH
01C8 0138
RX6FLOWTHRESH
01C8 013C
RX7FLOWTHRESH
01C8 0140
RX0FREEBUFFER
01C8 0144
RX1FREEBUFFER
01C8 0148
RX2FREEBUFFER
01C8 014C
RX3FREEBUFFER
01C8 0150
RX4FREEBUFFER
01C8 0154
RX5FREEBUFFER
01C8 0158
RX6FREEBUFFER
01C8 015C
RX7FREEBUFFER
01C8 0160
MACCONTROL
01C8 0164
MACSTATUS
REGISTER NAME
Reserved. Do not write.
Receive Channel 0 Free Buffer Count Register
Reserved. Do not write.
MAC Control Register
MAC Status Register (RXQOSACT field is reserved.)
01C8 0168 – 01C8 016C
–
01C8 0170
TXINTSTATRAW
01C8 0174
TXINTSTATMASKED
01C8 0178
TXINTMASKSET
01C8 017C
TXINTMASKCLEAR
01C8 0180
MACINVECTOR
01C8 0184 – 01C8 018F
–
01C8 0190
RXINTSTATRAW
01C8 0194
RXINTSTATMASKED
01C8 0198
RXINTMASKSET
Receive Interrupt Mask Set Register
(Bits 7–1 are reserved and only support writes of 0.)
01C8 019C
RXINTMASKCLEAR
Receive Interrupt Mask Clear Register
(Bits 7–1 are reserved and only support writes of 0.)
01C8 01A0
MACINTSTATRAW
MAC Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
01C8 01A4
MACINTSTATMASKED
01C8 01A8
MACINTMASKSET
01C8 01AC
MACINTMASKCLEAR
01C8 01B0
MACADDRL0
01C8 01B4
MACADDRL1
152
Reserved
Transmit Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
Transmit Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
Transmit Interrupt Mask Set Register
Transmit Interrupt Mask Clear Register
MAC Input Vector Register
Reserved
Receive Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
(Bits 7–1 are reserved.)
Receive Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
(Bits 7–1 are reserved.)
MAC Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
MAC Interrupt Mask Set Register
MAC Interrupt Mask Clear Register
MAC Address Channel 0 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01B8
MACADDRL2
01C8 01BC
MACADDRL3
01C8 01C0
MACADDRL4
01C8 01C4
MACADDRL5
01C8 01C8
MACADDRL6
01C8 01CC
MACADDRL7
01C8 01D0
MACADDRM
MAC Address Middle Byte Register
01C8 01D4
MACADDRH
MAC Address High Bytes Register
01C8 01D8
MACHASH1
MAC Address Hash 1 Register
01C8 01DC
MACHASH2
MAC Address Hash 2 Register
Reserved. Do not write.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-70. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 01E0
BOFFTEST
REGISTER NAME
01C8 01E4
TPACETEST
Transmit Pacing Test Register
01C8 01E8
RXPAUSE
Receive Pause Timer Register
01C8 01EC
TXPAUSE
Transmit Pause Timer Register
Backoff Test Register
01C8 01F0 – 01C8 01FF
–
01C8 0200 – 01C8 05FF
(see Table 5-71)
Reserved
01C8 0600
TX0HDP
Transmit Channel 0 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0604
TX1HDP
Transmit Channel 1 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0608
TX2HDP
Transmit Channel 2 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 060C
TX3HDP
Transmit Channel 3 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0610
TX4HDP
Transmit Channel 4 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0614
TX5HDP
Transmit Channel 5 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0618
TX6HDP
Transmit Channel 6 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 061C
TX7HDP
Transmit Channel 7 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0620
RX0HDP
Receive Channel 0 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0624
RX1HDP
01C8 0628
RX2HDP
01C8 062C
RX3HDP
01C8 0630
RX4HDP
01C8 0634
RX5HDP
01C8 0638
RX6HDP
EMAC Statistics Registers
Reserved. Do not write.
01C8 063C
RX7HDP
01C8 0640
TX0INTACK
Transmit Channel 0 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0644
TX1INTACK
Transmit Channel 1 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0648
TX2INTACK
Transmit Channel 2 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 064C
TX3INTACK
Transmit Channel 3 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0650
TX4INTACK
Transmit Channel 4 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0654
TX5INTACK
Transmit Channel 5 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0658
TX6INTACK
Transmit Channel 6 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 065C
TX7INTACK
Transmit Channel 7 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0660
RX0INTACK
Receive Channel 0 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0664
RX1INTACK
01C8 0668
RX2INTACK
01C8 066C
RX3INTACK
01C8 0670
RX4INTACK
01C8 0674
RX5INTACK
01C8 0678
RX6INTACK
01C8 067C
RX7INTACK
01C8 0680 – 01C8 0FFF
–
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Reserved. Do not write.
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
153
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-71. EMAC Statistics Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0200
RXGOODFRAMES
Good Receive Frames Register
REGISTER NAME
01C8 0204
RXBCASTFRAMES
Broadcast Receive Frames Register
01C8 0208
RXMCASTFRAMES
Multicast Receive Frames Register
01C8 020C
RXPAUSEFRAMES
Pause Receive Frames Register
01C8 0210
RXCRCERRORS
01C8 0214
RXALIGNCODEERRORS
Receive CRC Errors Register
Receive Alignment/Code Errors Register
01C8 0218
RXOVERSIZED
01C8 021C
RXJABBER
Receive Oversized Frames Register
01C8 0220
RXUNDERSIZED
Receive Undersized Frames Register
01C8 0224
RXFRAGMENTS
Receive Frame Fragments Register
01C8 0228
RXFILTERED
01C8 022C
RXQOSFILTERED
01C8 0230
RXOCTETS
Receive Octet Frames Register
01C8 0234
TXGOODFRAMES
Good Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0238
TXBCASTFRAMES
Broadcast Transmit Frames Register
01C8 023C
TXMCASTFRAMES
Multicast Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0240
TXPAUSEFRAMES
Pause Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0244
TXDEFERRED
Deferred Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0248
TXCOLLISION
Collision Register
01C8 024C
TXSINGLECOLL
01C8 0250
TXMULTICOLL
01C8 0254
TXEXCESSIVECOLL
01C8 0258
TXLATECOLL
Receive Jabber Frames Register
Filtered Receive Frames Register
Reserved
Single Collision Transmit Frames Register
Multiple Collision Transmit Frames Register
Excessive Collisions Register
Late Collisions Register
01C8 025C
TXUNDERRUN
01C8 0260
TXCARRIERSLOSS
Transmit Underrun Register
01C8 0264
TXOCTETS
Transmit Carrier Sense Errors Register
Transmit Octet Frames Register
01C8 0268
FRAME64
01C8 026C
FRAME65T127
Transmit and Receive 64 Octet Frames Register
Transmit and Receive 65 to 127 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0270
FRAME128T255
Transmit and Receive 128 to 255 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0274
FRAME256T511
Transmit and Receive 256 to 511 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0278
FRAME512T1023
Transmit and Receive 512 to 1023 Octet Frames Register
01C8 027C
FRAME1024TUP
Transmit and Receive 1024 or Above Octet Frames Register
01C8 0280
NETOCTETS
Network Octet Frames Register
01C8 0284
RXSOFOVERRUNS
Receive Start of Frame Overruns Register
01C8 0288
RXMOFOVERRUNS
Receive Middle of Frame Overruns Register
01C8 028C
RXDMAOVERRUNS
Receive DMA Overruns Register
01C8 0290 – 01C8 05FF
–
Reserved
Table 5-72. EMAC Wrapper
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 1000 – 01C8 1FFF
01C8 2000 – 01C8 2FFF
REGISTER NAME
EMAC Control Module Descriptor Memory
–
Reserved
Table 5-73. EWRAP Registers
154
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 3000
EWTRCTRL
01C8 3004
EWCTL
REGISTER NAME
TR control
Interrupt control register
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-73. EWRAP Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 3008
EWINTTCNT
01C8 300C – 01C8 37FF
–
5.16.3
REGISTER NAME
Interrupt timer count
Reserved
EMAC Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-74. Timing Requirements for MRCLK (see Figure 5-63)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(MRCLK)
Cycle time, MRCLK
40
ns
2
tw(MRCLKH)
Pulse duration, MRCLK high
14
ns
3
tw(MRCLKL)
Pulse duration, MRCLK low
14
ns
1
2
3
MRCLK
Figure 5-63. MRCLK Timing (EMAC – Receive)
Table 5-75. Timing Requirements for MTCLK (see Figure 5-63)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(MTCLK)
Cycle time, MTCLK
40
ns
2
tw(MTCLKH)
Pulse duration, MTCLK high
14
ns
3
tw(MTCLKL)
Pulse duration, MTCLK low
14
ns
1
2
3
MTCLK
Figure 5-64. MTCLK Timing (EMAC – Transmit)
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
155
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 5-76. Timing Requirements for EMAC MII Receive 10/100 Mbit/s (1) (see Figure 5-65)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tsu(MRXD-MRCLKH)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before MRCLK high
8
ns
2
th(MRCLKH-MRXD)
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after MRCLK high
8
ns
(1)
Receive selected signals include: MRXD3-MRXD0, MRXDV, and MRXER.
1
2
MRCLK (Input)
MRXD3−MRXD0,
MRXDV, MRXER (Inputs)
Figure 5-65. EMAC Receive Interface Timing
Table 5-77. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC MII Transmit
10/100 Mbit/s (1) (see Figure 5-66)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
1
(1)
td(MTCLKH-MTXD)
Delay time, MTCLK high to transmit selected signals valid
UNIT
MIN
MAX
5
25
ns
Transmit selected signals include: MTXD3–MTXD0, and MTXEN.
1
MTCLK (Input)
MTXD3−MTXD0,
MTXEN (Outputs)
Figure 5-66. EMAC Transmit Interface Timing
156
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.17 Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
The MDIO module controls PHY configuration and status monitoring.
5.17.1
Device-Specific Information
The management data input/output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in order to
enumerate all PHY devices in the system.
The management data input/output (MDIO) module implements the 802.3 serial management interface to
interrogate and control Ethernet PHY(s) using a shared two-wire bus. Host software uses the MDIO
module to configure the auto-negotiation parameters of each PHY attached to the EMAC, retrieve the
negotiation results, and configure required parameters in the EMAC module for correct operation. The
module is designed to allow almost transparent operation of the MDIO interface, with very little
maintenance from the core processor.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) / Management Data Input/Output
(MDIO) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU628) describes the DM642 MDIO peripheral in
detail. Some of the features documented in this peripheral reference guide are not supported on the
DM642 at this time. The DM642 only supports one EMAC module. For a list of supported registers and
register fields, see Table 5-78 [MDIO Registers] in this data manual.
5.17.2
Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-78. MDIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 3800
VERSION
MDIO Version Register
REGISTER NAME
01C8 3804
CONTROL
MDIO Control Register
01C8 3808
ALIVE
01C8 380C
LINK
MDIO PHY Alive Indication Register
01C8 3810
LINKINTRAW
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt Register
(MAC1 field is reserved and only supports writes of 0.)
01C8 3814
LINKINTMASKED
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt (Masked) Register
(MAC1 field is reserved and only supports writes of 0.)
01C8 3818
USERINTRAW
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Register
(MAC1 field is reserved and only supports writes of 0.)
01C8 381C
USERINTMASKED
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt (Masked) Register
(MAC1 field is reserved and only supports writes of 0.)
01C8 3820
USERINTMASKSET
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Set Register
(MAC1 field is reserved and only supports writes of 0.)
01C8 3824
USERINTMASKCLEAR
MDIO PHY Link Status Register
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Clear Register
(MAC1 field is reserved and only supports writes of 0.)
01C8 3828
USERACCESS0
MDIO User Access Register 0
01C8 382C
USERACCESS1
Reserved. Do not write.
01C8 3830
USERPHYSEL0
MDIO User PHY Select Register 0
01C8 3834
USERPHYSEL1
Reserved. Do not write.
01C8 3838 – 01C8 3FFF
–
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
157
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.17.3
www.ti.com
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-79. Timing Requirements for MDIO Input (see Figure 5-67)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(MDCLK)
Cycle time, MDCLK
400
ns
2
tw(MDCLK)
Pulse duration, MDCLK high/low
180
ns
3
tsu(MDIO-MDCLKH)
Setup time, MDIO data input valid before MDCLK high
10
ns
4
th(MDCLKH-MDIO)
Hold time, MDIO data input valid after MDCLK high
0
ns
1
MDCLK
3
4
MDIO
(input)
Figure 5-67. MDIO Input Timing
Table 5-80. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MDIO Output
(see Figure 5-68)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
7
td(MDCLKL-MDIO)
Delay time, MDCLK low to MDIO data output valid
UNIT
MIN
MAX
–10
100
ns
1
MDCLK
7
MDIO
(output)
Figure 5-68. MDIO Output Timing
158
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.18 Timer
The C6000™ DSP device has 32-bit general-purpose timers that can be used to:
• Time events
• Count events
• Generate pulses
• Interrupt the CPU
• Send synchronization events to the DMA
The timers have two signaling modes and can be clocked by an internal or an external source. The timers
have an input pin and an output pin. The input and output pins (TINP and TOUT) can function as timer
clock input and clock output. They can also be respectively configured for general-purpose input and
output.
With an internal clock, for example, the timer can signal an external A/D converter to start a conversion, or
it can trigger the DMA controller to begin a data transfer. With an external clock, the timer can count
external events and interrupt the CPU after a specified number of events.
5.18.1
Timer Device-Specific Information
The DM642 device has a total of three 32-bit general-purpose timers (Timer0, Timer1, and Timer2).
Timer2 is not externally pinned out.
For more detailed information, see the TMS320C6000 DSP 32-Bit Timer Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU582).
5.18.2
Timer Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-81. Timer 0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
0194 0000
CTL0
Timer 0 control register
Determines the operating mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the function of the TOUT pin.
0194 0004
PRD0
Timer 0 period register
Contains the number of timer input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the TSTAT signal frequency.
0194 0008
CNT0
Timer 0 counter register
Contains the current value of the incrementing counter.
0194 000C – 0197 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 5-82. Timer 1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
0198 0000
CTL1
Timer 1 control register
Determines the operating mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the function of the TOUT pin.
0198 0004
PRD1
Timer 1 period register
Contains the number of timer input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the TSTAT signal frequency.
0198 0008
CNT1
Timer 1 counter register
Contains the current value of the incrementing counter.
0198 000C – 019B FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 5-83. Timer 2 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
01AC 0000
CTL2
Timer 2 control register
Determines the operating mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status.
01AC 0004
PRD2
Timer 2 period register
Contains the number of timer input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the TSTAT signal frequency.
01AC 0008
CNT2
Timer 2 counter register
Contains the current value of the incrementing counter.
01AC 000C – 01AF FFFF
–
Reserved
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
159
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.18.3
www.ti.com
Timer Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-84. Timing Requirements for Timer Inputs (1) (see Figure 5-69)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tw(TINPH)
Pulse duration, TINP high
8P
ns
2
tw(TINPL)
Pulse duration, TINP low
8P
ns
(1)
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
Table 5-85. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Timer Outputs (1)
(see Figure 5-69)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
MAX
3
tw(TOUTH)
Pulse duration, TOUT high
8P – 3
ns
4
tw(TOUTL)
Pulse duration, TOUT low
8P – 3
ns
(1)
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
2
1
TINPx
4
3
TOUTx
Figure 5-69. Timer Timing
160
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
5.19 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
The GPIO peripheral provides dedicated general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or
outputs. When configured as an output, you can write to an internal register to control the state driven on
the output pin. When configured as an input, you can detect the state of the input by reading the state of
an internal register.
In addition, the GPIO peripheral can produce CPU interrupts and EDMA events in different interrupt/event
generation modes.
5.19.1
GPIO Device-Specific Information
To use the GP[15:0] software-configurable GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP Enable (GPEN) Register
and the GPxDIR bits in the GP Direction (GPDIR) Register must be properly configured.
GPxEN = 1
GP[x] pin is enabled
GPxDIR = 0
GP[x] pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1
GP[x] pin is an output
where "x" represents one of the 15 through 0 GPIO pins
Figure 5-70 shows the GPIO enable bits in the GPEN register for the DM642 device. To use any of the
GPx pins as general-purpose input/output functions, the corresponding GPxEN bit must be set to "1"
(enabled). Default values are device-specific, so refer to Figure 5-70 for the DM642 default configuration.
31
16
Reserved
R-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP15
EN
GP14
EN
GP13
EN
GP12
EN
GP11
EN
GP10
EN
GP9
EN
GP8
EN
GP7
EN
GP6
EN
GP5
EN
GP4
EN
GP3
EN
GP2
EN
GP1
EN
GP0
EN
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writable, -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 5-70. GPIO Enable Register (GPEN) [Hex Address: 01B0 0000]
Figure 5-71 shows the GPIO direction bits in the GPDIR register. This register determines if a given GPIO
pin is an input or an output providing the corresponding GPxEN bit is enabled (set to "1") in the GPEN
register. By default, all the GPIO pins are configured as input pins.
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
161
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
31
16
Reserved
R-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP15
DIR
GP14
DIR
GP13
DIR
GP12
DIR
GP11
DIR
GP10
DIR
GP9
DIR
GP8
DIR
GP7
DIR
GP6
DIR
GP5
DIR
GP4
DIR
GP3
DIR
GP2
DIR
GP1
DIR
GP0
DIR
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writable, -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 5-71. GPIO Direction Register (GPDIR) [Hex Address: 01B0 0004]
For more detailed information on general-purpose inputs/outputs (GPIOs), see the TMS320C6000 DSP
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU584).
5.19.2
GPIO Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-86. GP0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
162
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01B0 0000
GPEN
GP0 enable register
01B0 0004
GPDIR
GP0 direction register
01B0 0008
GPVAL
GP0 value register
01B0 000C
–
01B0 0010
GPDH
Reserved
GP0 delta high register
01B0 0014
GPHM
GP0 high mask register
01B0 0018
GPDL
GP0 delta low register
01B0 001C
GPLM
GP0 low mask register
01B0 0020
GPGC
GP0 global control register
01B0 0024
GPPOL
GP0 interrupt polarity register
01B0 0028 – 01B3 EFFF
–
Reserved
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
5.19.3
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-87. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (1)
(2)
(see Figure 5-72)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
(1)
(2)
UNIT
MAX
1
tw(GPIH)
Pulse duration, GPIx high
8P
ns
2
tw(GPIL)
Pulse duration, GPIx low
8P
ns
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the DSP recognize
the GPIx changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to at least 12P to allow the DSP
enough time to access the GPIO register through the CFGBUS.
Table 5-88. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs (1)
(see Figure 5-72)
NO.
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
MIN
3
4
(1)
(2)
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
Pulse duration, GPOx high
Pulse duration, GPOx low
UNIT
MAX
24P – 8 (2)
ns
(2)
ns
24P – 8
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 720 MHz, use P = 1.39 ns.
This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the
GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 5-72. GPIO Port Timing
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
163
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
5.20 JTAG
The JTAG interface is used for BSDL testing and emulation of the DM642 device.
Note: IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
5.20.1
JTAG Device-Specific Information
5.20.1.1
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement
The TMS320DM642 DSP requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be properly
initialized. While RESET initializes the DSP core, TRST initializes the DSP's emulation logic. Both resets
are required for proper operation.
Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by TCLK; otherwise, BSCAN may not respond as
expected after TRST is asserted.
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for
the DSP to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG port
interface and DSP's emulation logic in the reset state. TRST only needs to be released when it is
necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the DSP or exercise the DSP's boundary scan functionality.
RESET must be released only in order for boundary-scan JTAG to read the variant field of IDCODE
correctly. Other boundary-scan instructions work correctly independent of current state of RESET.
For maximum reliability, the TMS320DM642 DSP includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to
ensure that TRST will always be asserted upon power up and the DSP's internal emulation logic will
always be properly initialized. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high.
However, some third-party JTAG controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup
resistor on TRST. When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to intialize the DSP after powerup
and externally drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations.
Following the release of RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must be "seen" to latch the state of
EMU1 and EMU0. The EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Emulation
mode. For more detailed information, see the terminal functions section of this data sheet.
Note: The DESIGN_WARNING section of the TMS320DM642 BSDL file contains information and
constraints regarding proper device operation while in Boundary Scan Mode.
5.20.1.2
JTAG ID Register Description
The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG/Device ID. For the
DM642 device, the JTAG ID register resides at address location 0x01B3 F008. The register hex value for
the DM642 device is: 0x0007 902F. For the actual register bit names and their associated bit field
descriptions, see Figure 5-73 and Table 5-89.
31-28
27-12
11-1
0
VARIANT (4-Bit)
PART NUMBER (16-Bit)
MANUFACTURER (11-Bit)
LSB
R-0000
R-0000 0000 0111 1001
R-0000 0010 111
R-1
Legend: R = Read only, -n = value after reset
Figure 5-73. JTAG ID Register Description – TMS320DM642 Register Value – 0x0007 902F
164
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Table 5-89. JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:28
VARIANT
DESCRIPTION
Variant (4-Bit) value.DM642 value: 0000.
27:12
PART NUMBER
11–1
MANUFACTURER
0
LSB
5.20.2
Part Number (16-Bit) value. DM642 value: 0000 0000 0111 1001.
Manufacturer (11-Bit) value. DM642 value: 0000 0010 111.
LSB. This bit is read as a "1" for DM642.
JTAG Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 5-90. JTAG ID Register
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B3 F008
JTAGID
5.20.3
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Read-only. Provides 32-bit
JTAG ID of the device.
JTAG Identification Register
JTAG Test-Port Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-91. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-74)
–500
–600
–720
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(TCK)
Cycle time, TCK
35
ns
3
tsu(TDIV-TCKH)
Setup time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid before TCK high
10
ns
4
th(TCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid after TCK high
9
ns
Table 5-92. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port
(see Figure 5-74)
NO.
2
–500
–600
–720
PARAMETER
td(TCKL-TDOV)
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
UNIT
MIN
MAX
0
18
ns
1
TCK
2
2
TDO
4
3
TDI/TMS/TRST
Figure 5-74. JTAG Test-Port Timing
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
165
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Revision History
NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version.
This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS200M device-specific
data sheet to make it an SPRS200N revision.
Scope: Reference to Errata added to Packaging Information.
SEE
Section 4.3
166
ADDS/CHANGES/DELETES
Added note regarding VOH and VOL.
DM642 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
6 Mechanical Data
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA − GDK, GNZ, ZDK, and
ZNZ mechanical packages.
6.1
Thermal Data
Table 6-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [GDK]
NO.
AIR FLOW (m/s) (1)
N/A
1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
3.3
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
7.92
N/A
18.2
0.00
15.3
0.5
3
4
5
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
13.7
1.0
6
12.2
2.00
7
0.37
0.00
8
0.47
0.5
0.57
1.0
10
0.7
2.00
11
11.4
0.00
12
11
0.5
10.7
1.0
10.2
2.00
9
13
PsiJT
PsiJB
Junction-to-package top
Junction-to-board
14
(1)
°C/W
m/s = meters per second
Table 6-2. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [GNZ]
NO.
AIR FLOW (m/s) (1)
N/A
1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
3.3
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
7.46
N/A
17.4
0.00
14.0
0.5
3
4
5
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
12.3
1.0
6
10.8
2.00
7
0.37
0.00
0.47
0.5
8
9
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
0.57
1.0
10
0.7
2.00
11
11.4
0.00
12
11
0.5
10.7
1.0
10.2
2.00
13
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
14
(1)
°C/W
m/s = meters per second
Table 6-3. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [ZDK]
NO.
(1)
°C/W
AIR FLOW (m/s) (1)
1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
3.3
N/A
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
7.92
N/A
m/s = meters per second
Mechanical Data
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
167
TMS320DM642
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-3. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [ZDK] (continued)
NO.
°C/W
AIR FLOW (m/s) (1)
3
18.2
0.00
15.3
0.5
4
5
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
13.7
1.0
6
12.2
2.00
7
0.37
0.00
8
0.47
0.5
0.57
1.0
10
0.7
2.00
11
11.4
0.00
12
11
0.5
10.7
1.0
10.2
2.00
9
13
PsiJT
PsiJB
Junction-to-package top
Junction-to-board
14
Table 6-4. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [ZNZ]
NO.
°C/W
AIR FLOW (m/s) (1)
1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
3.3
N/A
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
7.46
N/A
3
17.4
0.00
4
14.0
0.5
5
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
12.3
1.0
6
10.8
2.00
7
0.37
0.00
8
0.47
0.5
0.57
1.0
10
0.7
2.00
11
11.4
0.00
12
11
0.5
9
13
PsiJT
PsiJB
Junction-to-package top
Junction-to-board
14
(1)
168
10.7
1.0
10.2
2.00
m/s = meters per second
Mechanical Data
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
TMS320DM642
www.ti.com
6.2
SPRS200N – JULY 2002 – REVISED OCTOBER 2010
Packaging Information
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current released data available for the
designated device(s). This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
Figure 6-1 shows some examples of the types of DM642 package symbolization for −500 MHz, −600
MHz, and −720 MHz devices. Pin A1 is always located at the top-left corner when you can read the
silkscreening/laser-etching and view the TI logo properly.
Pin A1
Pin A1
DIGITAL MEDIA
PROCESSOR
TMX320DM642GNZ
@ 2003 TI
Dx-YMLLLLS
V
Lot T race Code
nn
Pin A1
DIGITAL MEDIA
PROCESSOR
nnn
DIGITAL MEDIA
PROCESSOR
TMS320DM642AGNZ
@ 2005 TI
Dx-YMLLLLS
TMS320DMG42AGNZ
@ 2005 TI
Dx-YMLLLLS
V
V
Lot T race Code
Lot T race Code
Figure 6-1. Example, Lot Trace Codes for TMX320DM642 and TMS320DM642 (GDK and GNZ Packages)
For more details on package markings, see the TMS320DM642 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata
(Literature Number: SPRZ196).
Mechanical Data
Copyright © 2002–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320DM642
169
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
26-Jul-2022
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status
(1)
Package Type Package Pins Package
Drawing
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead finish/
Ball material
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C)
Device Marking
Samples
(4/5)
(6)
TMS320DM642AGDK6
ACTIVE
FCCSP
GDK
548
60
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GDK
TMS320DM642AGDK7
ACTIVE
FCCSP
GDK
548
60
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GDK
720
TMS320DM642AGDKA5
ACTIVE
FCCSP
GDK
548
60
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GDK
A5
TMS320DM642AGDKA6
ACTIVE
FCCSP
GDK
548
60
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GDK
A6
TMS320DM642AGNZ6
ACTIVE
FCBGA
GNZ
548
40
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GNZ
TMS320DM642AGNZ7
ACTIVE
FCBGA
GNZ
548
40
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GNZ
720
TMS320DM642AGNZA5
ACTIVE
FCBGA
GNZ
548
40
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GNZ
A5
TMS320DM642AGNZA6
ACTIVE
FCBGA
GNZ
548
40
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
SNPB
Level-4-220C-72 HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
GNZ
A6
TMS320DM642AZDK5
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZDK
548
60
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZDK
500
TMS320DM642AZDK6
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZDK
548
60
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
Call TI
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
Addendum-Page 1
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
Orderable Device
26-Jul-2022
Status
(1)
Package Type Package Pins Package
Drawing
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead finish/
Ball material
MSL Peak Temp
Op Temp (°C)
Device Marking
(3)
Samples
(4/5)
(6)
ZDK
TMS320DM642AZDK7
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZDK
548
60
Non-RoHS &
Non-Green
Call TI
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZDK
720
TMS320DM642AZDK7HK
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZDK
548
60
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
Call TI
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZDK
720
TMS320DM642AZDKA6
NRND
FCBGA
ZDK
548
60
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZDK
A6
TMS320DM642AZNZ5
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZNZ
548
40
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZNZ
500
TMS320DM642AZNZ6
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZNZ
548
40
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZNZ
TMS320DM642AZNZ7
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZNZ
548
40
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZNZ
720
TMS320DM642AZNZA5
NRND
FCBGA
ZNZ
548
40
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZNZ
A5
TMS320DM642AZNZA6
ACTIVE
FCBGA
ZNZ
548
40
RoHS-Exempt
& Non-Green
SNAGCU
Level-4-260C-72HR
TMS320DM642A
@ 2003 TI
ZNZ
A6
(1)
The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
Addendum-Page 2
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
Samples
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
26-Jul-2022
(2)
RoHS: TI defines "RoHS" to mean semiconductor products that are compliant with the current EU RoHS requirements for all 10 RoHS substances, including the requirement that RoHS substance
do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, "RoHS" products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. TI may
reference these types of products as "Pb-Free".
RoHS Exempt: TI defines "RoHS Exempt" to mean products that contain lead but are compliant with EU RoHS pursuant to a specific EU RoHS exemption.
Green: TI defines "Green" to mean the content of Chlorine (Cl) and Bromine (Br) based flame retardants meet JS709B low halogen requirements of
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
